GMC Yukon Owner's Manual - Warning Signs
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . 9 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 114 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 174 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 183 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 377 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 396 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 406 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
2 Introduction
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, GMC, the GMC Truck Emblem, YUKON, and DENALI are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Company" for GMC wherever it appears in this manual.
This manual describes features that may or may not be on the vehicle because of optional equipment that was not purchased on the vehicle, model variants, country specifications, features/applications that may not be available in your region, or changes subsequent to the printing of this owner's manual.
Refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm the features.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
A French language manual can be obtained from your dealer, at www.helminc.com, or from:
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 USA
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 84367243 B Second Printing
©2019 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Danger, Warning, and Caution
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.
{ Danger
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.
{ Warning
Warning indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.
Caution Caution indicates a hazard that could result in property or vehicle damage.
A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means "Do Not," "Do not do this," or "Do not let this happen."
Introduction 3
Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.
M : Shown when the owner's
manual has additional instructions or information.
* : Shown when the service
manual has additional instructions or information.
0 : Shown when there is more
information on another page -- "see page."
4 Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. See the features in this manual for information.
u : Air Conditioning System G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil 9 : Airbag Readiness Light ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) $ : Brake System Warning Light 9 : Dispose of Used Components
Properly
P : Do Not Apply High Pressure
Water
B : Engine Coolant Temperature _ : Flame/Fire Prohibited H : Flammable [ : Forward Collision Alert R : Fuse Block Cover Lock
Location
+ : Fuses j : ISOFIX/LATCH System Child
Restraints
Q : Keep Fuse Block Covers
Properly Installed
| : Lane Change Alert @ : Lane Departure Warning A : Lane Keep Assist * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure X : Park Assist ~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator O : Power 7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert I : Registered Technician
/ : Remote Vehicle Start > : Seat Belt Reminders I : Side Blind Zone Alert h : Stop/Start 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
a : Under Pressure V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator
Instrument Panel Overview
Introduction 5
6 Introduction
1. Air Vents 0 180.
2. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 147 (If Equipped).
3. g Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control 0 226.
j Power Assist Steps 0 32 (If
Equipped).
X Park Assist Button (If
Equipped). See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 242.
A Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
0 251 (If Equipped).
0 Pedal Adjust Switch (If
Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 0 201.
4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 169.
Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 116.
5. Favorite Switches (Out of View). See "Steering Wheel Controls" in the infotainment manual.
Volume Switches (Out of View). See "Steering Wheel Controls" in the infotainment manual.
6. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 168.
7. Instrument Cluster 0 126.
8. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission 0 213.
Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.
Range Selection Mode (If Equipped). See Manual Mode 0 216.
9. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System 0 167.
10. Infotainment 0 174.
11. Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 175.
12. Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 54 (If Equipped).
13. Rear Climate Control Buttons. See Rear Climate Control System 0 179.
14. Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 202 or Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 204.
15. Steering Wheel Controls. See the infotainment manual.
16. Horn 0 116.
17. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 115.
18. Hood Release. See Hood 0 284.
19. Cruise Control 0 230.
Adaptive Cruise Control 0 232 (If Equipped).
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 245 (If Equipped).
Heated Steering Wheel 0 116 (If Equipped).
20. Trailer Brake Control Panel (If Equipped). See Towing Equipment 0 270.
21. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 136.
22. Automatic Transfer Case Knob (If Equipped). See Four-Wheel Drive 0 219.
23. Parking Brake 0 225.
24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.
Fog Lamps 0 169 (If Equipped).
25. Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 170.
Introduction 7
8 Introduction
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks Keys (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . 9 Keys (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 23 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 25 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Doors Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Vehicle Security Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 33
Keys, Doors, and Windows 9
Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . 35 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Immobilizer Operation (Key
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Immobilizer Operation (Keyless
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Keys and Locks
Keys (Keyless Access)
{ Warning
Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 39 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Interior Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 41 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 41 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Windows Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Leaving children in a vehicle with an ignition key or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power window or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the key in the ignition or with the RKE transmitter in the vehicle, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with the ignition key or an RKE transmitter.
Roof Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
10 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The key, inside the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be used for all locks.
If the vehicle has the Keyless Access system, there is a key in the transmitter.
To remove the key, press the button on the side of the RKE transmitter near the bottom, and pull the key out. Never pull the key out without pressing the button.
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed.
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, inspect the key blade for debris. Periodically clean with a brush or pick.
With an active OnStar or connected service plan, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 410.
If locked out of the vehicle, see Roadside Assistance Program 0 400.
If equipped with memory seats, RKE transmitters 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats 0 51.
Keys (Key Access)
{ Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with an ignition key or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power window or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the key in the ignition or with the RKE transmitter in the vehicle, and
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with the ignition key or an RKE transmitter.
{ Warning
If the key is unintentionally rotated while the vehicle is running, the ignition could be
(Continued)
Keys, Doors, and Windows 11
Warning (Continued)
moved out of the RUN position. This could be caused by heavy items hanging from the key ring, or by large or long items attached to the key ring that could be contacted by the driver or steering wheel. If the ignition moves out of the RUN position, the engine will shut off, braking and steering power assist may be impacted, and airbags may not deploy. To reduce the risk of unintentional rotation of the ignition key, do not change the way the ignition key and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped, are connected to the provided key rings.
attachment of the provided key ring. It is important that any replacement ignition keys have a small hole. See your dealer if a replacement key is required.
The combination and size of the rings that came with your keys were specifically selected for your vehicle. The rings are connected to the key like two links of a chain to reduce the risk of unintentionally moving the key out of the RUN position. Do not add any additional items to the ring attached to the ignition key. Attach additional items only to the second ring, and limit added items to a few essential keys or small, light items no larger than an RKE transmitter.
The ignition key and key rings, and RKE transmitter, if equipped, are designed to work together as a system to reduce the risk of unintentionally moving the key out of the RUN position. The ignition key has a small hole to allow
12 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Interference from radio-frequency identification (RFID) tags may prevent the key from starting the vehicle. Keep RFID tags away from the key when starting the vehicle.
3. Quickly, within five seconds, insert the second original already programmed key in the ignition and turn the ignition on without starting the engine.
The key can be used for the ignition, and all locks.
4. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
If equipped with memory seats, keys 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats 0 51.
5. Insert the new key to be programmed, and within five seconds, turn the ignition on without starting the engine.
Programming Keys to the Vehicle
Follow these procedures to program up to eight keys to the vehicle.
Programming with Two Recognized Keys (Key Vehicles Only)
To program a new key:
1. Insert the original, already programmed key in the ignition and turn the ignition on without starting the engine.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 15 if additional keys are to be programmed.
If a key is lost or damaged, see your dealer to have a new key made.
Programming without Recognized Keys (Key Vehicles Only)
Program a new key to the vehicle when a recognized key is not available. Canadian regulations require that Canadian owners see their dealer.
If two currently recognized keys are not available, follow this procedure to program the first key.
This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes to complete for the first key. The vehicle must be off and all of the keys must be with you.
1. Insert the new vehicle key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition on without starting the engine. The security light will come on.
3. Wait 10 minutes until the security light turns off.
4. Turn the ignition off.
5. Repeat Steps 24 two more times. After the third time, turn the ignition on; the key is learned and all previously known keys will no longer work with the vehicle.
6. To learn the second key, turn the ignition off, insert the second key to be learned, and turn the ignition on without starting the engine.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 13
After the two keys are learned, remaining keys can be learned by following the procedure in "Programming with Two Recognized Keys (Key Vehicles Only)."
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed.
If locked out of the vehicle, see Roadside Assistance Program 0 400.
. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
. Check the transmitter's battery. See "Battery Replacement" later in this section.
. If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
With an active OnStar or connected service plan, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 410.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
If there is a decrease in the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) operating range:
The RKE transmitter functions may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 13.
. Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle.
14 Keys, Doors, and Windows
when Q is pressed again within
three seconds. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Pressing Q arms the alarm system.
See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.
/ : Press and release Q, then immediately press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash or for at least four seconds. The engine may be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 23.
Q : Press to lock all doors.
If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled, the horn chirps
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding Q for
one second will fold the mirrors, if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
K : Press once to unlock the driver door. If K is pressed again within
three seconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. If enabled, the exterior lamps may turn on. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
pressing and holding K for
one second will unfold the mirrors, if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Press and hold K until the windows
fully open, if remote window operation is enabled. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
b : Press twice to open or close
the liftgate. Press once to stop the liftgate from moving.
c : Press twice to open the
liftglass.
7 : Press and release to initiate the
vehicle locator. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold 7 for more than
three seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is turned on or 7
is pressed again. The ignition must
be off for the panic alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it. See your dealer for transmitter programming.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery in the transmitter soon if the Driver Information Center displays REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 15
Caution
When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate and remove the back cover of the transmitter with a flat, thin object, such as a coin.
2. Press and slide the battery down toward the pocket of the transmitter in the direction of the key ring. Do not use a metal object
3. Remove the battery.
4. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
5. Push together the transmitter back cover top side first, and then the bottom toward the key ring.
16 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access)
The Keyless Access system allows for vehicle entry when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See "Keyless Access Operation" later in this section.
The RKE transmitter functions may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 13.
Q : Press to lock all doors.
If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash once on the second press to indicate locking has occurred.
If enabled, the horn chirps when Q
is pressed again within
three seconds. See Vehicle
Personalization 0 152.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed and Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout is enabled, all doors will lock and then the driver door will
immediately unlock. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152. If the
passenger door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock.
Pressing Q arms the alarm system.
See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.
K : Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K is pressed again
within three seconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. If enabled, the exterior lamps may turn on. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.
Press and hold K until the windows
fully open, if remote window operation is enabled. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
b : Press twice to open or close
the liftgate. Press once to stop the liftgate from moving.
c : Press twice to open the
liftglass.
7 : Press and release to initiate
vehicle locate. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold 7 for more than
three seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is turned on or 7
is pressed again. The ignition must be off for the panic alarm to work.
/ : Press and release Q, then immediately press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash or for at
Keys, Doors, and Windows 17
least four seconds. The engine may
be started from outside the vehicle
using the RKE transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start 0 23.
Keyless Access Operation
The Keyless Access system allows for doors and the liftgate to be accessed without pressing the RKE transmitter button. The RKE transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door being opened. If the vehicle has this feature, there will be a button on the outside door handles.
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door
When the doors are locked and the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver door handle will unlock the driver door. If the lock/unlock button is pressed again within five seconds, all passenger doors and the liftgate will unlock.
Keyless Access can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. Keyless access can also be turned off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
If equipped with memory seats, RKE transmitters 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats 0 51.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
18 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:
. It has been more than five seconds since the first lock/ unlock button press.
. Two lock/unlock button presses were used to unlock all doors.
. Any vehicle door has been opened and all doors are now closed.
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Passenger Doors
When the doors are locked and the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger door handle will unlock all doors. Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:
. The lock/unlock button was used to unlock all doors.
. Any vehicle door has been opened and all doors are now closed.
Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking of Exterior Door Handles and Liftgate
If equipped, keyless unlocking of the exterior door handles and liftgate can be disabled and enabled.
Disabling Keyless Unlocking:
With the vehicle off, press and hold
Q and K on the RKE transmitter at
the same time for approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash four times quickly to indicate access is disabled. Using any exterior handle to unlock the doors or open the liftgate will cause the turn signal lamps to flash four times quickly, indicating access is disabled. If disabled, disarm the alarm system before starting the vehicle.
Enabling Keyless Unlocking:
With the vehicle off, press and hold
Q and K on the RKE transmitter at
the same time for approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash twice quickly to indicate access is enabled. Enabling and disabling may also be
configured from the personalization menu. See "Passive Door Unlock" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Passive Locking
If equipped with Keyless Access, this feature will lock the vehicle several seconds after all doors are closed, if the vehicle is off and at least one RKE transmitter has been removed from the interior, or none remain in the interior.
If other electronic devices interfere with the RKE transmitter signal, the vehicle may not detect the RKE transmitter inside the vehicle. If passive locking is enabled, the doors may lock with the RKE transmitter inside the vehicle. Do not leave the RKE transmitter in an unattended vehicle.
To customize the doors to automatically lock when exiting the vehicle, see "Remote Lock, Unlock, Start" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Temporary Disable of Passive Locking
Temporarily disable passive locking
by pressing and holding K on the
interior door switch with a door open for at least four seconds, or until three chimes are heard. Passive locking will then remain disabled
until Q on the interior door is
pressed, or until the vehicle is turned on.
Remote Left In Vehicle Alert
When the vehicle is turned off and an RKE transmitter is left in the vehicle, the horn will chirp three times after all doors are closed. To turn on or off see Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert
If the vehicle is on with a door open, and then all doors are closed, the vehicle will check for RKE transmitters inside. If an RKE transmitter is not detected, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display NO REMOTE DETECTED and the horn will chirp three times.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 19
This occurs only once each time the vehicle is driven. To turn on or off see Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Keyless Liftgate Opening
Press the touch pad on the underside of the liftgate handle to open the liftgate when all doors are unlocked, or when the transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft).
Keyless Liftglass Opening
Press the exterior liftglass button to open the liftglass when all doors are unlocked, or when the transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft).
See Liftgate 0 27.
programmed through your dealer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed so that lost or stolen transmitters no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters matched to it.
Programming with Recognized Transmitters
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle when there are two recognized transmitters.
To program, the vehicle must be off and all transmitters, both currently recognized and new, must be with you.
Key Access
To access a vehicle with a weak transmitter battery, see Door Locks 0 24.
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and
1. Remove the key from the recognized transmitter.
2. Place the two recognized transmitters in the cupholder or on the passenger seat.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder on the driver door handle. Then turn the key counterclockwise, to the unlock position, five times within 10 seconds.
20 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The DIC displays READY FOR REMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.
5. Press ENGINE START/STOP. When the transmitter is learned, the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next transmitter.
6. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and
press K or Q on the
transmitter.
To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 46.
4. Place the new transmitter in the transmitter pocket/insert.
Open the center console storage area and the storage tray. The transmitter pocket/ insert is in front of the storage area next to the center console storage area between the driver and front passenger seats.
When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for approximately 12 seconds to exit programming mode.
7. Return the key back into the transmitter.
Programming without Recognized Transmitters
If two currently recognized transmitters are not available, follow this procedure to program up to eight transmitters. This feature is not available in Canada. This procedure will take approximately
30 minutes to complete. The vehicle must be off and all transmitters to be programmed must be with you.
1. Remove the vehicle key from the transmitter.
2. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder on the driver door handle; then turn the key counterclockwise, to the unlock position, five times within 10 seconds.
The DIC displays REMOTE LEARN PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
3. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC displays PRESS ENGINE START BUTTON TO LEARN, then press ENGINE START/STOP.
The DIC will again display REMOTE LEARN PENDING, PLEASE WAIT.
4. Repeat Step 3 two additional times. After the third time all previously known transmitters will no longer work with the
vehicle. Remaining transmitters can be relearned during the next steps. The DIC should now display READY FOR REMOTE # 1.
5. Place the new transmitter in the transmitter pocket/insert. Open the center console storage area and the storage tray. The transmitter pocket/ insert is in front of the storage area next to the center console storage area between the driver and front passenger seats.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 21
6. Press ENGINE START/STOP. When the transmitter is learned, the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next transmitter.
7. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket/insert
and press K or Q on the
transmitter.
TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE when starting the vehicle.
To start the vehicle:
1. Open the center console storage area and the storage tray.
To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 57.
When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold ENGINE START/STOP for approximately 12 seconds to exit programming mode.
8. Return the key back into the transmitter.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Battery
If the transmitter battery is weak or if there is interference with the signal, the DIC may display NO REMOTE DETECTED or NO REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN
2. Place the transmitter in the transmitter pocket/insert.
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral) press the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP.
Replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible.
22 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery in the transmitter soon if the DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.
1. Press the button on the side of the RKE transmitter and pull the key out. Never pull the key out without pressing the button.
Caution
When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
2. With the key removed, insert a flat, thin object in the center of the transmitter to separate and remove the back cover.
3. Lift the battery with a flat object.
4. Remove the battery.
5. Insert the new battery, positive side toward the back cover. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
6. Push together the transmitter.
7. Reinsert the key.
Remote Vehicle Start
The climate control system will come on when the vehicle is started remotely depending on the outside temperature.
The rear defog and heated and ventilated seats may also come on. See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 54 and Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use remote start if the vehicle is low on fuel. The vehicle could run out of fuel.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if:
. The vehicle is not off.
. The key is in the ignition (Key Access) or the RKE transmitter is in the vehicle (Keyless Access).
. The hood is not closed.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 23
. There is an emission control system malfunction and the malfunction indicator lamp is on.
The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if:
. The coolant temperature gets too high.
. The oil pressure gets low.
The RKE transmitter range may be reduced while the vehicle is running.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 0 13 or Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Starting the Engine Using Remote Start
1. Press and release Q.
2. Immediately press and hold /
until the turn signal lamps flash or for at least four seconds.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for 15 minutes. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a 15-minute time extension.
Turn the ignition on to operate the vehicle.
Extending Engine Run Time
The engine run time can be extended by 15 minutes, for a total of 30 minutes, if during the first 15 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are repeated while the engine is still running. An extension can be requested, 30 seconds after starting.
A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start with an extension, is allowed between ignition cycles.
The vehicle's ignition must be turned on and then back off to use remote start again.
24 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do one of the following:
. Press and hold / until the
parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Turn the ignition on and then off.
Door Locks
{ Warning
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. The doors can be unlocked and opened while the vehicle is moving. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
passengers should wear seat belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.
To lock or unlock the doors from outside the vehicle:
. Press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
. Use the key in the driver door.
To lock or unlock the doors from inside the vehicle:
. Press Q or K on the power door
lock switch.
. Pushing down the manual lock knob on the driver door will lock all doors. Pushing down the manual lock knob on a passenger door will lock only that door.
. Pulling an interior door handle will unlock the door. Pulling the door handle again unlatches it.
Keyless Access
If equipped, the RKE transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate or door being opened. Press the button on the door handle to open. See "Keyless Access Operation" in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
Free-Turning Locks
The door key lock cylinder turns freely when either the wrong key is used, or the correct key is not fully inserted. The free-turning door lock feature prevents the lock from being forced open. To reset the lock, turn it to the vertical position with the correct key fully inserted. Remove the key and insert it again. If this does not reset the lock, turn the key halfway around in the cylinder and repeat the reset procedure.
Power Door Locks
Press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 25
When Q is pressed on the power
door lock switch while the door is open, a chime will sound three times indicating delayed locking is active.
The doors will lock automatically five seconds after all doors are closed. If a door is reopened before that time, the five-second timer will reset when all doors are closed again.
Q : Press to lock the doors. K : Press to unlock the doors.
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors until five seconds after all doors are closed.
Delayed locking can only be turned on when the Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout feature has been turned off.
Press Q on the door lock switch again or press Q on the RKE
transmitter to lock the doors immediately.
This feature can be programmed. See "Delayed Door Lock" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
If a vehicle door is unlocked, and then opened and closed, the doors will lock either when your foot is
26 Keys, Doors, and Windows
removed from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).
To unlock the doors:
. Press K on the power door lock
switch.
. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
Automatic door locking cannot be disabled. Automatic door unlocking can be programmed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Lockout Protection
Key Access : When locking is requested with the driver door open and the key in the ignition, all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock.
This can be manually overridden by
pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
Keyless Access : When locking is requested with the driver door open and the vehicle is on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY, all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock.
If the vehicle is off and locking is requested while a door is open, when all doors are closed the vehicle will check for RKE transmitters inside. If an RKE transmitter is detected and the number of RKE transmitters inside has not reduced, the driver door will unlock and the horn will sound three times.
This can be manually overridden by
pressing and holding Q on the
power door lock switch.
Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout is turned on and the vehicle is off, the driver door is open, and locking is requested, all the doors will lock and the driver door will remain open. The Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout feature can be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Safety Locks
The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
Press { to activate the safety locks
on the rear doors. The indicator light comes on when activated.
Press { again to deactivate the
safety locks.
Doors
Liftgate
{ Warning
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
. Close all of the windows.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
(Continued)
Keys, Doors, and Windows 27
Warning (Continued)
Manual Liftgate
. Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See "Climate Control Systems" in the Index.
. If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust 0 212.
Caution
To avoid damage to the liftgate or liftgate glass, make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.
To open the liftgate, press K on the power door lock switch or press K
on the RKE transmitter twice to unlock all doors. Press the touch pad (1) on the underside of the liftgate handle and lift up.
Press the button (2) above the license plate to open the liftglass,
or press c twice quickly on the
RKE transmitter. Do not leave the liftglass open when raising the liftgate.
28 Keys, Doors, and Windows
There will be a delay in the release of the liftglass if there is an attempt to open it while the rear wiper is in motion.
Use the pull cup to lower and close the liftgate. Do not press the touch pad while closing the liftgate. This will cause the liftgate to be unlatched.
Power Liftgate Operation
{ Warning
You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing.
The liftgate can be opened when locked if the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
Caution
Driving with an open and unsecured liftgate may result in damage to the power liftgate components.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged.
If equipped, the power liftgate switch is on the overhead console. The vehicle must be in P (Park).
The modes are:
MAX : Opens to maximum height.
3/4 : Opens to a reduced height that can be set from 3/4 to fully open. Use to prevent the liftgate from opening into overhead obstructions such as a garage door or roof-mounted cargo. The liftgate can be opened manually all the way.
OFF : Opens manually only.
To power open or close the liftgate, select MAX or 3/4 mode and then:
. Press b twice quickly on the
RKE transmitter until the liftgate moves.
. Press 8 on the overhead
console. The driver door must be unlocked or locked without the security armed.
. Press the touch pad on the underside of the liftgate handle after unlocking all doors. If equipped with Keyless Access, a locked vehicle can be opened if the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the touch pad.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 29
. Press l on the bottom edge of
the liftgate next to the latch to close.
Press any liftgate button, the touch
pad, or b on the RKE transmitter
while the liftgate is moving to stop it. Pressing any liftgate button or
pressing b twice quickly on the
RKE transmitter restarts the operation in the reverse direction. Pressing the touch pad on the liftgate handle will restart the motion, but only in the opening direction.
time. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. Select OFF on the liftgate switch.
If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate will continue to completion. If the vehicle is accelerated before the liftgate has completed moving, the liftgate may stop or reverse direction. Check for Driver Information Center (DIC) messages and make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving.
Falling Liftgate Detection
Caution
Manually forcing the liftgate to open or close during a power cycle can damage the vehicle. Allow the power cycle to complete.
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled in extremely low temperatures, or after repeated power cycling over a short period of
If the power liftgate automatically closes after a power opening cycle, it indicates that the system is reacting to excess weight on the liftgate or a possible support strut failure. Remove any excess weight. A repetitive chime will sound while the falling liftgate detection feature is operating. If the liftgate continues to automatically close after opening, see your dealer for service before using the power liftgate.
30 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Interfering with the power liftgate motion or manually closing the liftgate too quickly after power opening may resemble a support strut failure. This could also activate the falling liftgate detection feature. Allow the liftgate to complete its operation and wait a few seconds before manually closing the liftgate.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, the liftgate will automatically reverse direction and move a short distance away from the obstacle. After removing the obstruction, the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle, the power function will deactivate. After removing the obstructions, manually close the liftgate. This will allow normal power operation functions to resume.
If the vehicle is locked while the liftgate is closing, and an obstacle is encountered that prevents the
liftgate from completely closing, the horn will sound as an alert that the liftgate did not close.
Pinch sensors are on the side edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the liftgate and the vehicle and presses against a sensor, the liftgate will reverse direction and stop at a partially open position. The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually.
Setting the 3/4 Mode
To change the position the liftgate stops at when opening:
1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode and power open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement at the desired height by pressing any liftgate button. Manually adjust the liftgate position if needed.
3. Press and hold l on the
bottom edge of the liftgate next to the latch on the outside of the liftgate until the turn signals
flash and a beep sounds. This indicates the setting has been recorded.
The liftgate cannot be set below a minimum programmable height. If there is no light flash or sound, then the height adjustment may be too low.
Manual Operation
Select OFF to manually operate the liftgate. See "Manual Liftgate" at the beginning of this section.
Caution
Attempting to move the liftgate too quickly and with excessive force may result in damage to the vehicle.
Operate the liftgate manually with a smooth motion and moderate speed. The system includes a feature which limits the manual closing speed to protect the components.
Hands-Free Operation
If equipped with Hands-Free Vehicle Access, the liftgate may be operated with a kicking motion under the rear bumper.
The liftgate will not operate if the RKE transmitter is not within 1 m (3 ft).
The hands-free feature will not work while the liftgate is moving. To stop the liftgate while in motion use one of the liftgate switches.
The hands-free feature can be customized. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152. Choose from the following:
On-Open and Close : The kicking motion is activated to both open and close the liftgate.
On-Open Only : The kicking motion is activated to only open the liftgate.
Off : The feature is disabled.
Length of Kick Zone
Keys, Doors, and Windows 31
To operate, move your foot in a forward kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper, then pull it back.
Caution
Splashing water may cause the liftgate to open. Keep the RKE transmitter away from the rear bumper detection area or turn the liftgate mode to OFF when cleaning or working near the rear bumper to avoid accidental opening.
. Do not sweep your foot side to side.
. Do not keep your foot under the bumper; the liftgate will not activate.
. Do not touch the liftgate until it has stopped moving.
. This feature may be temporarily disabled under some conditions. If the liftgate does not respond to the kick, open or close the
32 Keys, Doors, and Windows
liftgate by another method or start the vehicle. The feature will be re-enabled.
When closing the liftgate using this feature, there will be a short delay. The rear lights will flash and a chime will sound. Step away from the liftgate before it starts moving.
Power Assist Steps
{ Warning
To avoid personal injury or property damage, before entering or exiting the vehicle, be sure the power assist step is fully extended. Do not step on the power assist step while it is moving. Never place hands or other body parts between the extended power assist step and the vehicle.
If equipped, the power assist steps will deploy when the door is opened and automatically retract three seconds after the door is closed. The power assist steps will retract immediately if the vehicle starts moving.
Disable the power assist steps before jacking or placing any object under the vehicle. Too much ice buildup may prevent deployment of the power assist steps. Check the step position before exiting the vehicle. If this happens, disable the power assist steps, clear the ice, then enable the assist steps and confirm normal function prior to use.
Keep hands, children, pets, objects, and clothing clear of the power assist steps when in motion. The steps will reverse direction if they encounter an obstruction when opening or closing. Remove the obstruction, then open and close the door on the same side to complete the motion of the assist steps. If the obstruction is not cleared, the assist steps remain extended while driving.
To extend both power assist steps
for cleaning, press j while the
vehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
Press j again to retract them.
The DIC will display a message.
Enable/Disable
Press and hold j for four seconds
to lock and disable the power assist
steps. Press and hold j for
four seconds again to enable them. The DIC will display a message.
Auto Power Assist Steps
This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152. Select Off, On, or Extended.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 33
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal.
Vehicle Alarm System
Arming the Alarm System
1. Turn off the vehicle.
2. Lock the vehicle in one of three ways: . Use the RKE transmitter. . Use the Keyless Access system.
. With a door open, press Q
on the interior of the door.
The indicator light, on the instrument panel near the windshield, indicates the status of the system.
Off : Alarm system is disarmed.
On Solid : Vehicle is secured during the delay to arm the system.
Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured. A door, liftgate, or the hood is open.
Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.
3. After 30 seconds the alarm system will arm, and the indicator light will begin to
slowly flash. Pressing Q on the
RKE transmitter a second time will bypass the 30-second delay and immediately arm the alarm system.
The vehicle alarm system will not arm if the doors are locked with the key.
If the driver door is opened without first unlocking with the RKE transmitter, the horn will chirp and the lights will flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started, or the door is not unlocked
34 Keys, Doors, and Windows
by pressing K on the RKE
transmitter during the 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will be activated.
The alarm will also be activated if a passenger door, the liftgate, or the hood is opened without first disarming the system. When the alarm is activated, the turn signals flash and the horn sounds for about 30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor for the next unauthorized event.
. Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter, or use the Keyless Access system.
Unlocking the driver door with the key will not disarm the system or turn off the alarm.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If K is pressed on the RKE
transmitter and the horn chirps three times, an alarm occurred previously while the alarm system was armed.
Disarming the Alarm System
To disarm the alarm system or turn off the alarm if it has been activated:
. Press K on the RKE transmitter.
. Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Access system.
. Start the vehicle.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
. Lock the vehicle after all occupants have exited.
If the alarm has been activated, a message will appear on the DIC.
Power Sounder, Inclination Sensor, and Intrusion Sensor
In addition to the standard theft-deterrent system features, this system may also have a power sounder, inclination sensor, and intrusion sensor.
The power sounder provides an audible alarm which is distinct from the vehicle's horn. It has its own
power source, and can sound an alarm if the vehicle's battery is compromised.
The inclination sensor can set off the alarm if it senses movement of the vehicle, such as a change in vehicle orientation.
The intrusion sensor monitors the vehicle interior, and can activate the alarm if it senses unauthorized entry into the vehicle's interior. Do not allow passengers or pets to remain in the vehicle when the intrusion sensor is activated.
Before arming the theft-deterrent system and activating the intrusion sensor:
. Make sure all doors and windows are completely closed.
. Secure any loose items such as a sunshades.
. Make sure there are no obstructions blocking the sensors in the front overhead console.
. Close DVD screens before leaving the vehicle.
Intrusion and Inclination Sensors Disable Switch
It is recommended that the intrusion and inclination sensors be deactivated if pets are left in the vehicle or the vehicle is being transported.
With the vehicle off, press o in
the front overhead console to turn off the feature. The indicator light will come on momentarily, indicating that these sensors have been disabled until the next time the alarm system is armed.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 35
Steering Column Lock
If equipped, the steering column lock is a theft-deterrent device. This feature locks the steering column when the vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened, or when the driver door is opened and then the vehicle is turned off. The steering column unlocks when the vehicle is turned on.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display one of these messages:
. A message to service the steering column lock indicates that an issue has been detected with the column lock feature and the vehicle should be serviced.
. A message that the steering column is locked indicates that the engine is running, but the steering column is still locked. It is normal for the column to be locked during a remote start, but the column should unlock after the brake pedal is pressed and
the vehicle is started. No message will display during a remote start.
. A message that the steering wheel must be turned and the vehicle must be started again indicates that the column lock mechanism is bound, the column locking device was unable to unlock the steering column, and the vehicle did not start. If this happens, immediately turn the steering wheel from side to side to unbind the column lock. If this does not unlock the steering column, turn the vehicle off and open the driver door to reset the system. Then turn the vehicle on and immediately turn the steering wheel side to side for about 15 seconds. In some cases, it may take significant force to unbind the column.
To keep the steering column from binding, straighten the front wheels before turning off the vehicle.
36 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
Immobilizer Operation (Key Access)
When trying to start the vehicle, the security light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off.
The system is automatically disarmed when the ignition is turned from off to on.
The security light, in the instrument cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. It may be necessary to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 315. If the engine still does not start with the other key, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement keys. Up to eight keys can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional keys, see Keys (Keyless Access) 0 9 or Keys (Key Access) 0 10. To program additional transmitters, see your dealer.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the vehicle theft system in the vehicle.
See your dealer to get a new key blank cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Immobilizer Operation (Keyless Access)
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the transmitter leaves the vehicle.
The immobilization system is disarmed when ENGINE START/ STOP is pressed and a valid transmitter is found in the vehicle.
The security light in the instrument cluster comes on when there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The system has one or more transmitters matched to an immobilizer control unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched transmitter will start the vehicle. If the transmitter is ever damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the security light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the vehicle off and try again.
If the vehicle will not change ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off), and the RKE transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another transmitter. Or, you may try placing the transmitter in the front cupholder. See "Starting the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Battery"
Keys, Doors, and Windows 37
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ Warning
If the engine does not start with the other transmitter or when the transmitter is in the pocket in the front cupholder, the vehicle needs service. See your dealer who can service the theft-deterrent system and have a new transmitter programmed to the vehicle.
Do not leave the transmitter or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.
38 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Power Mirrors
4. Press either (1) or (2) again to deselect the mirror. The indicator light goes off.
Exterior Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind. This feature comes on when the vehicle is started. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 0 41.
Shown with Power Folding Mirrors, Manual Folding Similar
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the driver or passenger side mirror. The indicator light comes on.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator on the mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change.
2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror up, down, right, or left.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen.
Folding Mirrors
Power Folding
To adjust power folding mirrors, if equipped:
1. Press { to fold the mirrors
inward.
2. Press { again to return the
mirrors to the driving position.
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
Reset the power folding mirrors if:
. The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding.
. They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
. The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power folding mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation.
Remote Mirror Folding
If equipped, press and hold Q on
the RKE transmitter for approximately one second to automatically fold the exterior
mirrors. Press and hold K on the
RKE transmitter for approximately
Keys, Doors, and Windows 39
one second to unfold. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
This feature is turned on or off through vehicle personalization. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Manual Folding
Fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has the automatic dimming mirror, the driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of the headlamps from behind.
Blind Spot Mirrors
If equipped, there is a small convex mirror built into the upper and outer corner of the driver outside mirror. It can show objects that may be in the vehicle's blind zone.
Heated Mirrors
K : Press to heat the mirrors.
See "Rear Window Defogger" under Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 175.
40 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Driving with the Blind Spot Mirror
1. When the approaching vehicle is a long distance away, the image in the main mirror is small and near the inboard edge of the mirror.
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the image in the main mirror gets larger and moves outboard.
3. As the vehicle enters the blind zone, the image transitions from the main mirror to the blind spot mirror.
4. When the vehicle is in the blind zone, the image only appears in the blind spot mirror.
Using the Outside Mirror with the Blind Spot Mirror
1. Set the main mirror so that the side of the vehicle can just be seen and the blind spot mirror has an unobstructed view.
Actual Mirror View
2. When checking for traffic or before changing a lane, look at the main driver/passenger side mirror to observe traffic in the adjacent lane, behind your vehicle. Check the blind spot
mirror for a vehicle in the blind zone. Then, glance over your shoulder to double check before moving slowly into the adjacent lane.
Reverse Tilt Mirrors
If equipped with memory seats, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the curb to be seen when parallel parking.
The mirror(s) return to the original position when:
. The vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or remains in R (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.
. The ignition is turned off.
. The vehicle is driven in R (Reverse) above a set speed.
To turn this feature on or off, see Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Interior Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirrors
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind your vehicle.
If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle may have three control buttons at the bottom of the mirror. See OnStar Overview 0 410.
To avoid accidental OnStar calls, clean the mirror with the ignition off. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.
Manual Rearview Mirror
If equipped with a manual rearview mirror, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use to avoid glare from the headlamps from behind.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 41
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
If equipped, automatic dimming reduces the glare of headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on when the vehicle is started.
Child-View Mirror
Windows
{ Warning
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.
If equipped, the child-view mirror is on the overhead console. Press the fixed button on the cover to release. Push the mirror back up when not in use.
42 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped.
Power Windows
{ Warning
Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat, use the window lockout button to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys (Keyless Access) 0 9 or Keys (Key Access) 0 10.
The power windows work when the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 209.
Using the window switch, press to open or pull to close the window.
The windows may be temporarily disabled if they are used repeatedly within a short time.
Window Lockout
This feature stops the rear passenger window switches from working.
. Press Z to engage the rear
window lockout feature. The indicator light is on when engaged.
. Press Z again to disengage.
Window Express Movement
All windows can be opened without holding the window switch. Press the switch down fully and quickly release to express open the window.
If equipped, pull the window switch up fully and quickly release to express close the window.
Briefly press or pull the window switch in the same direction to stop that window's express movement.
Window Automatic Reversal System
The express-close feature will reverse window movement if it comes in contact with an object. Extreme cold or ice could cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will operate normally after the object or condition is removed.
Automatic Reversal System Override
{ Warning
If automatic reversal system override is active, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before using automatic reversal system override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 43
When the engine is on, override the automatic reversal system by pulling and holding the window switch if conditions prevent it from closing.
Programming the Power Windows
Programming may be necessary if the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the window is unable to express-up, program each express-close window:
Remote Window Operation
If equipped, this feature allows the windows to be opened remotely. If enabled in vehicle personalization,
press and hold K on the RKE
transmitter. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Sun Visors
1. Close all doors.
2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
3. Partially open the window to be programmed. Then close it and continue to pull the switch briefly after the window has fully closed.
4. Open the window and continue to press the switch briefly after the window has fully opened.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window and, if equipped, extend along the rod.
44 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Roof
Sunroof
Slide Switch
Express-Open/Express-Close : To express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release I (1). To
express-close the sunroof, fully
press and release K (1). Press
the switch again to stop the movement.
1. SLIDE Switch 2. TILT Switch
If equipped, the sunroof only operates when the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 209.
Open/Close (Manual Mode) : To
open the sunroof, press and hold I
(1). Release the switch at the desired position. Press and hold
K (1) to close the sunroof.
Release the switch at the desired position.
Tilt Switch
Vent : From the closed position,
press J (2) to vent the sunroof. Press K (2) to close the
sunroof vent.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed.
The sunroof also has a sunshade which can be pulled forward to block sun rays. The sunshade must be opened and closed manually when the sunroof is in the vent or fully closed position.
Automatic Reversal System
The sunroof has an automatic reversal system that is only active when the sunroof is operated in express-close mode.
If an object is in the path while express closing, the reversal system will detect an object, stop, and open the sunroof slightly.
If frost or other conditions prevent closing, override the feature by closing the sunroof in manual mode. To stop movement, release the switch.
Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof operation or noise. It could also plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the water drainage system, this is normal.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 45
46 Seats and Restraints
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Front Seats Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 48 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Rear Seats Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Seat Belts Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 71 Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Replacing Seat Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Airbag System Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 75 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Passenger Sensing System . . . 80 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 84 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 85 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Child Restraints Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Infants and Young Children . . . . 88 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 90 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 92 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . 93 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 103 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Center Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Seats and Restraints 47
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the head restraint down. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable.
48 Seats and Restraints
Second Row Seats
The vehicle's second row seats have head restraints in the outboard seating positions that cannot be adjusted.
The second row seat outboard head restraints are not removable.
Third Row Seats
To lower the head restraint, press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the head restraint down.
Return the lowered head restraint to the upright position until it locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure it is locked.
If you are installing a child restraint in the third row seat, see "Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93.
Front Seats
Center Seat
If equipped, the center front seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the driver and passenger when the center front seat is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down.
Power Seat Adjustment
{ Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
The third row seat head restraint can be lowered to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied.
{ Warning
The power seats will work with the ignition off. Children could operate the power seats and be injured. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
To adjust the seat:
. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down.
. Raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 50.
To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 49.
Some vehicles are equipped with a feature that activates a vibrating pulse alert in the driver seat to help the driver avoid crashes. See Driver Assistance Systems 0 240.
Seats and Restraints 49 Lumbar Adjustment
To adjust the lumbar support: . If equipped, press and hold the
control forward to increase or rearward to decrease upper and lower lumbar support at the same time. . Press and hold the control up to increase upper lumbar support and decrease lower lumbar support. Press and hold the control down to increase lower lumbar support and decrease upper lumbar support.
50 Seats and Restraints Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback: . Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline. . Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the seat belts cannot do their job.
The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the seat belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.
Memory Seats
If equipped, memory seats allow two drivers to save and recall their unique seat positions for driving the vehicle, and a shared exit position for getting out of the vehicle. Other feature positions may also be saved, such as power mirrors and power steering wheel, if equipped. Memory positions are linked to RKE transmitter 1 or 2 for automatic memory recalls. Before saving, adjust all available memory feature positions. Turn the vehicle on and then press and release SET; a beep will sound.
Then immediately press and hold 1,
2, or B (Exit) until two beeps
sound. To manually recall these
positions, press and hold 1, 2, or B
until the saved position is reached. Follow the instructions under "Saving Memory Positions."
The vehicle identifies the current driver's RKE transmitter number (1 8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16. Only RKE transmitters 1 and 2 can be used for automatic memory recalls. A Driver Information Center (DIC) welcome message indicating the transmitter number may display for the first few ignition cycles following a transmitter change. For Auto Memory Recall to work properly, save the positions to the memory button (1 or 2) matching the RKE transmitter number displayed in the DIC welcome message. Carry the linked RKE transmitter when entering the vehicle.
Seats and Restraints 51
Vehicle Personalization Settings
. To have the Auto Memory Recall movement begin when the vehicle is started, select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Comfort and Convenience, and then Auto Memory Recall. Select On or Off. See "Auto Memory Recall" later in this section.
. To begin Easy Exit Recall movement when the vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened, or when the vehicle is turned off with the driver door already opened, select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Comfort and Convenience, and then Easy Exit Options. Select On or Off. See "Easy Exit Recall" later in this section.
. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152 for additional setting information.
52 Seats and Restraints
Identifying Driver Number
To identify the driver number:
1. Move your RKE transmitter away from the vehicle.
2. Start the vehicle with another key or RKE transmitter. The DIC should display the driver number for the other RKE transmitter. Turn the vehicle off and remove the key or RKE transmitter from the vehicle.
3. Start the vehicle with the initial key or RKE transmitter. The DIC should display the driver number of your RKE transmitter.
Saving Memory Positions
Read these instructions completely before saving memory positions.
To save preferred driving positions 1 and 2:
1. Turn the vehicle on or to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
A DIC welcome message may indicate driver number 1 or 2.
2. Adjust all available memory features to the desired driving position.
3. Press and release SET; a beep will sound.
4. Immediately press and hold the 1 or 2 memory button matching the above DIC welcome message until two beeps sound.
If too much time passes between releasing SET and pressing 1, the memory position will not be saved and two beeps will not sound. Repeat Steps 3 and 4.
1 or 2 corresponds to the driver number. See "Identifying Driver Number" previously in this section.
5. Repeat Steps 14 for a second driver using 1 or 2.
To save the position for B and
Easy Exit Recall features, repeat
Steps 14 using B. This saves the
position for getting out of the vehicle.
Save preferred memory feature positions to both 1 and 2 if you are the only driver.
Manually Recalling Memory Positions
Press and hold 1, 2, or B to recall
the previously saved memory positions if you are driver 1 or 2 identified in the DIC welcome message. RKE transmitters 38 will not recall memory positions.
To stop Manual Memory recall
movement, release 1, 2, or B or
press any of the following controls:
. Power seat
. Memory SET
. Power mirror, with the driver or passenger side mirror selected
. Power steering wheel, if equipped
Auto Memory Recall
The vehicle identifies the number of the current driver's RKE transmitter (18). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16. If the RKE transmitter is 1 or 2, and Auto Memory Recall is enabled in vehicle personalization, the positions saved to the same memory button number 1 or 2 are automatically recalled when the vehicle is turned on, or turned from off to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKE transmitters 38 will not provide automatic memory recalls.
To turn Auto Memory Recall on or off, see "Vehicle Personalization Settings" previously in this section and Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
The shift lever must be in P (Park) to start Auto Memory Recall. Auto Memory Recall will complete if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position.
To stop Auto Memory Recall movement, turn the vehicle off or press any of the following controls:
. Power seat
. Memory SET, 1, 2, or B
. Power mirror, with the driver or passenger side mirror selected
. Power steering wheel, if equipped
If the saved memory seat position does not automatically recall or recalls to the wrong positions, the driver's RKE transmitter number (1 or 2) may not match the memory button number that positions were saved to. Try storing the position to the other memory button or try the other RKE transmitter.
Easy Exit Recall
Easy Exit Recall is not linked to an RKE transmitter. The position saved
to B is used for all drivers. To turn
Easy Exit Recall on or off, see "Vehicle Personalization Settings" previously in this section and Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Seats and Restraints 53
If turned on, the position saved to
B is automatically recalled when
one of the following occurs:
. The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened within a short time.
. The vehicle is turned off with the driver door open.
To stop Easy Exit Recall movement, press any of the following memory controls:
. Power seat
. Memory SET, 1, 2, or B
. Power mirror, with the driver or passenger side mirror selected
. Power steering wheel, if equipped
Obstructions
If something has blocked the driver seat and/or power steering wheel while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction and try the recall again. If the memory position still does not recall, see your dealer.
54 Seats and Restraints
Heated and Ventilated Front Seats
{ Warning
If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.
The buttons are on the center stack below the climate control system. To operate, the engine must be running.
Press I to heat the driver or
passenger seatback only.
Press J to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and seatback.
If equipped, press C to ventilate the
driver or passenger seat.
The indicator light on the button comes on when this feature is on.
Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high for an extended time, their level may automatically be lowered.
The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.
Remote Start Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats
During a remote start, the heated or ventilated seats can be turned on automatically. When it is cold outside, the heated seats turn on, and when it is hot outside the ventilated seats turn on. The heated or ventilated seats are canceled when the ignition is turned on. Press the heated or ventilated seat button to use the heated or ventilated seats after the vehicle is started.
The heated or ventilated seat indicator lights do not turn on during a remote start.
The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.
The heated or ventilated seats will not turn on during a remote start unless they are enabled in the vehicle personalization menu. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 23 and Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Reminder
If equipped, the message REAR SEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEAT displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle.
This feature will activate when a second row door is opened while the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat.
The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing the second row doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered
Seats and Restraints 55
the vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off.
The feature can be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Heated Rear Seats
{ Warning
If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. See the Warning under Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 54.
56 Seats and Restraints
Second Row Seats
Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback:
If equipped, the buttons are on the rear of the center console.
Press M or L to heat the left
outboard or right outboard seat cushion.
Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the heated seat changes to the next lower setting, and then the off setting. Indicator lights on the button show the setting: three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
If the heated seats are on high for an extended time, their level may automatically be lowered.
1. Lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully while applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position. If the lever is lifted without applying pressure, the seat will release to a folded position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
The second row seats can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seat.
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
{ Warning
Do not leave the second row seat in a tumbled position while the vehicle is in motion. A tumbled seat is not locked. It can move when the vehicle is in motion. People in the vehicle could be injured in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position before driving the vehicle. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.
Caution
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat To fold and tumble the seat:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat.
2. Lift the lever, on the outboard side of the seat, to release the seatback.
Seats and Restraints 57
The seatback will fold forward to create a flat load floor. If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the upright position.
58 Seats and Restraints
3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
4. The rear pull strap can also be used to fold or fold and tumble the seat. It is easier to tumble the seat with the rear pull strap once the seat is folded flat.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat from the Third Row Seat
{ Warning
Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seat:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat.
2. Pull the strap on the bottom rear of the second row seat to release the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.
3. Pull the strap again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
Automatic Fold and Tumble Feature (If Equipped)
{ Warning
Do not leave the second row seat in a tumbled position while the vehicle is in motion. A tumbled seat is not locked. It can move when the vehicle is in motion. People in the vehicle could be injured in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position before driving the vehicle. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.
{ Warning
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release switch.
Caution
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.
The transmission must be in P (Park) for this feature to work. Fold the seat to load cargo. Fold and tumble the seat for entry to the third row.
Seats and Restraints 59
Folding and Tumbling the Seat To fold and tumble the seat: 1. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
Driver Side Rear Panel Switch 2. Press the automatic seat
release switch on the panel behind the rear doors. The seatback automatically folds flat. 3. Press the switch again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
60 Seats and Restraints
Folding and Tumbling the Seat from the Cargo Area
1. Second Row Power Seat Switches
2. Third Row Power Seat Switches
To fold and tumble the seat from the cargo area: 1. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat. 2. Press the switch (1) on the side trim of the cargo area to fold the seatback.
The left switch folds the left seatback, and the right switch folds the right seatback.
3. Press the switch again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
The switches (2) can be used to fold and unfold the third row seatbacks from the cargo area. See Third Row Seats 0 60.
Returning the Seat to the Sitting Position
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.
To return the seat to the sitting position from the tumbled position:
1. Pull the seat down until both sides of the seat are latched to the floor. Make sure the seat is securely latched to the floor before raising the seatback. If both sides are not latched to the floor, the seatback will not raise.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Third Row Seats
Folding the Seatback
Caution
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.
The transmission must be in P (Park) for this feature to work.
The third row seatbacks can be folded to increase cargo space.
3. Fully lower the head restraints. See Head Restraints 0 47. Put the second row seatback in the upright position. See Second Row Seats 0 56.
Seats and Restraints 61
1. Second Row Power Seat Fold and Tumble Switches, if equipped.
2. Third Row Power Seat Fold and Raise Switches, if equipped.
To fold the seatback:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the third row seat.
2. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat.
4. Disconnect the rear seat belt mini-latch, using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, and let the belt retract into the headliner.
5. Stow the mini-latch in the holder in the headliner.
6. Press and hold the switch (2) on the side trim of the cargo area to fold the third row seatback.
The left switch folds the left seatback, and the right switch folds the right seatback.
7. Repeat the steps for the other seatback, if desired.
The switches (1) can be used to fold or fold and tumble the second row seats from the cargo area. See Second Row Seats 0 56.
62 Seats and Restraints Returning the Third Row Seatback to the Upright Position
1. Second Row Power Seat Fold and Tumble Switches
2. Third Row Power Seat Fold and Raise Switches
To return the third row seatback to the upright position: 1. Open the liftgate to access the
controls for the seat. 2. Press and hold the switch (2)
on the side trim of the cargo area to raise the third row seatback.
The left switch raises the left seatback, and the right switch raises the right seatback.
{ Warning
A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Reconnect the center seat belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let it twist.
4. Pull on the seat belt to be sure the mini-latch is secure.
5. Repeat the steps for the other seatback, if desired.
Seat Belts
This section describes how to use seat belts properly, and some things not to do.
{ Warning
Do not let anyone ride where a seat belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing seat belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing seat belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the seat belts. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 133.
Why Seat Belts Work
When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the seat belts!
When you wear a seat belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the seat belts. That is why wearing seat belts makes such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Seat Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a seat belt?
A: You could be -- whether you are wearing a seat belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Seats and Restraints 63
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear seat belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with seat belts -- not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing seat belts.
How to Wear Seat Belts Properly
Follow these rules for everyone's protection.
There are additional things to know about seat belts and children, including smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children 0 86 or Infants and Young Children 0 88. Review and follow the rules for children in addition to the following rules.
64 Seats and Restraints
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing seat belts. There are important things to know about wearing a seat belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you (if possible).
. Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
{ Warning
You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your seat belt properly.
Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.
Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.
Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.
Seats and Restraints 65
{ Warning
The seat belt can be pinched if it is routed under plastic trim on the seat, such as trim around the rear seatback folding handle or side airbag. In a crash, pinched seat belts might not be able to provide adequate protection. Never allow seat belts to be routed under plastic trim pieces.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position, if equipped, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt 0 71.
If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable seat belt, and the seat belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats 0 60 for instructions on reconnecting the seat belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
66 Seats and Restraints
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see "Seats" in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. See Child Restraint Systems 0 90. If this occurs, let the belt go back all the way and start again. If the locking feature stays engaged after letting the belt go back to stowed position on the seat, move the seat rearward or recline the seat until the shoulder belt retractor lock releases.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the front outboard seating position may affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 80.
For front seating positions, if the webbing locks in the latch plate before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to unlock.
"Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster" in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.
Seats and Restraints 67
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, check if the correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Seat Belt Extender 0 71.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
For third row seats, it may be necessary to pull stitching on the seat belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position.
For third row seats, slide the latch plate up the safety webbing when the seat belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the seat belt.
Always stow the seat belt slowly. If the seat belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the seat belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer.
68 Seats and Restraints
Before a door is closed, be sure the seat belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a seat belt, damage can occur to both the seat belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front outboard passenger positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. See How to Wear Seat Belts Properly 0 63.
Push down on the release button to move the height adjuster to the desired position.
Move the adjuster up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has seat belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants. Although the seat belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the seat belt assembly. They can help tighten the seat belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. Seat belt pretensioners can also help tighten the seat belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other parts of the vehicle's seat belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash 0 72.
Do not sit on the outboard seat belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in the seat. Sitting on the seat belt can damage the webbing and hardware.
Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides
{ Warning
A seat belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
Second Row Outboard Seating Positions
The vehicle has comfort guides for the second row outboard seating positions. The comfort guides are stored on a clip on the interior trim next to the outboard seatback.
To install:
Rear seat belt comfort guides may provide added seat belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior trim next to the outboard seatback.
Seats and Restraints 69
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
70 Seats and Restraints
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be behind the belt with the plastic guide on the front.
4. Buckle, position, and release the seat belt as described previously in this section. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the seat belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide onto its storage clip.
Third Row Seating Positions
Comfort guides are available through your dealer for third row seating positions. Instructions are included with the guides.
Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy
Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear seat belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a seat belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seat belts effective is wearing them properly.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 65. The vehicle may have a center seating position with a lap seat belt. The lap seat belt does not have a retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Seat Belt Extender 0 71.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the seat belt quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
Seats and Restraints 71
Seat Belt Extender
If the vehicle's seat belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a seat belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child restraints. For more information on the proper use and fit of seat belt extenders see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety System Check
Periodically check the seat belt reminder, seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), and seat belt anchorages to make sure they are all in working order. Look for any other loose or damaged seat belt system parts that might keep a
72 Seats and Restraints
seat belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn, frayed, or twisted seat belts may not protect you in a crash. Torn or frayed seat belts can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately. If a belt is twisted, it may be possible to untwist by reversing the latch plate on the webbing. If the twist cannot be corrected, ask your dealer to fix it.
Make sure the seat belt reminder light is working. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 133.
Keep seat belts clean and dry. See Seat Belt Care 0 72.
Seat Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Seat belts should be properly cared for and maintained.
Seat belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary, exterior hard surfaces and seat belt webbing may be lightly cleaned with mild soap and water.
Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system.
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the seat belt system in the vehicle. A damaged seat belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the seat belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of seat belts may not be necessary. But the seat belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the seat belt assemblies inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the seat belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Have the seat belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 134.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
. A frontal airbag for the driver
. A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger
. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver
. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver and for the second and third row passengers seated directly behind the driver
. A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the second and third row passengers seated directly behind the front outboard passenger
The vehicle may have the following airbag:
. A front center airbag for the driver and front outboard passenger
Seats and Restraints 73
All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger.
For the front center airbag, the word AIRBAG is on the inboard side of the driver seatback.
For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback or side of the seat closest to the door.
For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by seat belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:
74 Seats and Restraints
{ Warning
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your seat belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with seat belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes seat belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 77.
Wearing your seat belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are "supplemental restraints" to the seat belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a seat belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Seat belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a seat belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The seat belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the front center armrest or console in vehicles with a front center airbag.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.
{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children 0 86 or Infants and Young Children 0 88.
Where Are the Airbags?
Seats and Restraints 75
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 134.
The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.
The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.
76 Seats and Restraints
If the vehicle has a front center airbag, it is in the inboard side of the driver seatback.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and second and third row outboard seating positions are in the ceiling above the side windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat or console accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag or the front center airbag, if equipped.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System 0 73. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag system's deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors that help the airbag system determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle also has a seat position sensor that enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver seat. The seat position sensor provides information that is used to adjust the deployment of the driver frontal airbag.
The front center airbag, if equipped, is designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending
Seats and Restraints 77
upon the location of the impact, when either side of the vehicle is struck. In addition, the front center airbag is designed to inflate when the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side. The front center airbag is not designed to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, or rear impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in
78 Seats and Restraints
rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck, if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or the repair costs.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.
For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 75.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by seat belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 77.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to seat belts.
What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?
After frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated. The front center airbag and roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 75.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{ Warning
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the
fuel system after the airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. After turning the ignition off and then on again, the fuel system will return to normal operation; the doors can be locked, the interior lamps can be turned off, and the hazard warning flashers can be turned off using the controls for those features. If any of these systems are damaged in the crash they may not operate as normal.
{ Warning
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 79
Warning (Continued)
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a
80 Seats and Restraints
crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 0 407 and Event Data Recorders 0 408. . Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
United States
Canada and Mexico
The words ON and OFF, or the symbols for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 135.
The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and
determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag should be allowed to inflate or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the airbag is off. If securing a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if:
. The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied.
. The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint.
. A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.
. There is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the OFF indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 135.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat.
Seats and Restraints 81
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the ON indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is active.
For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a seat belt properly -- whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
(Continued)
82 Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 134 for more information, including important safety information.
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if the system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint. If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 105 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 103 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106.
Make sure the seat belt retractor is locked by pulling the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor when installing the child restraint, even if the child restraint is equipped with a seat belt lock off. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints 0 47.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child's size. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the ON indicator is not lit.
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Sized Occupant
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the OFF indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat or that the child restraint locking feature is engaged. Use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult-sized occupants. If this happens, unbuckle the belt, let the belt go back all the way, and then buckle the belt again without pulling the belt out all the way.
6. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the ON indicator is lit.
Seats and Restraints 83
{ Warning
If the front outboard passenger airbag is turned off for an adult-sized occupant, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect that person in a crash, resulting in an increased risk of serious injury or even death. An adult-sized occupant should not ride in the front outboard passenger seat, if the passenger airbag OFF indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System Operation
Seat belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See "Seat Belts" and "Child Restraints" in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.
84 Seats and Restraints
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.
The ON indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
{ Warning
Stowing articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 405.
{ Warning
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal may keep the airbag system from working properly.
The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing, including improperly repairing or replacing, any parts of the following:
. Airbag system, including airbag modules, front or side impact sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, airbag wiring, or front center console
. Front seats, including stitching, seams or zippers
. Seat belts
. Steering wheel, instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling trim, or pillar garnish trim
. Inner door seals, including speakers
Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag modules and sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring along with the proper replacement procedures.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery, or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System 0 80.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 344 for additional important information.
If the vehicle must be modified because you have a disability and you have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other reason, call Customer Assistance. See Customer Assistance Offices 0 398.
Seats and Restraints 85
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 134.
Caution
If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag coverings, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 75. See your dealer for service.
86 Seats and Restraints
Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not properly protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 134.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's seat belts. The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:
. Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear seat belt comfort guide, if available. See "Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 65. If a comfort guide is not available, or if the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Can proper seat belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Q: What is the proper way to wear seat belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see "Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 65.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use seat belts properly.
{ Warning
Never allow more than one child to wear the same seat belt. The seat belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can be crushed together and seriously injured. A seat belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Seats and Restraints 87
{ Warning
Never allow a child to wear the seat belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen.
(Continued)
88 Seats and Restraints Warning (Continued)
That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the seat belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Neither the vehicle's seat belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ Warning
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant or child should be secured in an appropriate child restraint.
{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
Seats and Restraints 89
Child restraints are devices used to restrain, seat, or position children in the vehicle and are sometimes called child seats or car seats.
There are three basic types of child restraints:
. Forward-facing child restraints
. Rear-facing child restraints
. Belt-positioning booster seats
The proper child restraint for your child depends on their size, weight, and age, and also on whether the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.
For each type of child restraint, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the child restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The instruction manual that is provided with the child restraint states the weight and height limitations for that particular child
90 Seats and Restraints
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of child restraints available for children with special needs.
{ Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury in a crash, infants and toddlers should be secured in a rear-facing child restraint until age two, or until they reach the maximum height and weight limits of their child restraint.
Warning (Continued)
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in an appropriate child restraint.
Child Restraint Systems
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
{ Warning
A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle seat belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
(Continued)
Rear-Facing Infant Restraint
A rear-facing child restraint provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant.
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.
Booster Seats
A belt-positioning booster seat is used for children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint. Boosters are designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system until the child is large enough for the vehicle seat belts to fit properly without a booster seat. See the seat belt fit test in Older Children 0 86.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle seat belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraints must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93 for more information. Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
Seats and Restraints 91
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the following:
1. Instruction labels provided on the child restraint
2. Instruction manual provided with the child restraint
3. This vehicle owner's manual
The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
In some areas Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat
92 Seats and Restraints
inspection station. For CPST availability in Canada, check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint secured in a rear seating position.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
The vehicle may be equipped with a front center airbag in the inboard side of the driver seat. Even with a front center airbag, a child restraint can be installed in any second row seating position.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 80 for additional information.
{ Warning
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position.
When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others.
Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent seat belts or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the seat belt.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Seats and Restraints 93
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child restraint during driving or in a crash. LATCH attachments on the child restraint are used to attach the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. The LATCH system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. LATCH-compatible rear-facing and forward-facing child seats can be properly installed using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belts. Do not use both the seat belts and the LATCH anchorage system to secure a rear-facing or forward-facing child seat.
94 Seats and Restraints
Booster seats use the vehicle's seat belts to secure the child and the booster seat. If the manufacturer recommends that the booster seat be secured with the LATCH system, this can be done as long as the booster seat can be positioned properly and there is no interference with the proper positioning of the lap-shoulder belt on the child.
Make sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the seat belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
For a forward-facing 5-pt harness child restraint where the combined weight of the child and restraint are up to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either the lower LATCH anchorages with the top tether anchorage, or the seat belt with the top tether anchorage. Where the combined weight of the child and restraint are greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt with the top tether anchorage only.
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Seats and Restraints 95
Recommended Methods for Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint
Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Shown with an X
LATCH Lower Seat Belt Only Anchors Only
LATCH Lower Seat Belt and Anchors and Top Top Tether Tether Anchor Anchor
Up to
X
X
29.5 kg (65 lb)
Greater than
X
29.5 kg (65 lb)
Up to 29.5 kg (65 lb)
X
X
Greater than
X
29.5 kg (65 lb)
See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 105 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 103 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106.
Child restraints built after March 2014 will be labeled with the specific child weight up to which the LATCH system can be used to install the restraint.
The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions have lower anchors. In this case, the seat belt must be used (with top
tether where available) to secure the child restraint. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Center Front Seat) 0 105 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 103 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 106.
96 Seats and Restraints Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (2).
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (3,4) is used to secure the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment hook (2) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
The child restraint may have a single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Either will have a single attachment hook (2) to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations
Seats and Restraints 97
Second Row -- 60/40
H : Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
I : Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Second Row -- Bucket
H : Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
I : Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Third Row Seat
I : Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
To assist in locating the lower anchors, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
98 Seats and Restraints
To assist in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is near the top tether anchors for second row seats. For third row seats, the top tether anchor symbol is on the flipper panel.
Second Row Seat -- Bucket
For models with bucket second row seating, the top tether anchors are at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row. Be sure to use an anchor located directly behind the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Second Row Seat -- 60/40
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top tether anchors are at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row. Be sure to use an anchor located directly behind the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Third Row Seat
For the third row seat, the top tether anchors are on the back of the seatback. Move the flipper panel rearward to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located directly behind the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 92 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
{ Warning
A child could be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly attached to the vehicle using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle seat belt. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
Seats and Restraints 99
{ Warning
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor,
(Continued)
100 Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
Buckle any unused seat belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, and tighten the belt behind the child restraint after the child restraint has been installed.
Caution
Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle's seat belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled seat belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
Do not fold the rear seatback when the seat is occupied. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a seat belt buckled. This could damage the seat belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the seat belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat.
The vehicle is equipped with a front center airbag in the inboard side of the driver seat. Even with a front center airbag, a child restraint can be installed in any second row seating position.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint 0 92.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the seat belt and
top tether when recommended by the child restraint manufacturer. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual. For the third row outboard seating positions, if the head restraint interferes with the proper installation of the child restraint, then the head restraint may be removed. See "Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
For the third row seat, move the flipper panel rearward to access the top tether anchors.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:
and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.
Seats and Restraints 101
If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts.
If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.
If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint
If the position you are using has a fixed headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the
102 Seats and Restraints
tether around the inboard or outboard side of the headrest or head restraint.
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, for proper installation.
Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation
1. Partially fold the seatback forward. See Third Row Seats 0 60 for additional information.
If the position you are using has a fixed or an adjustable head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should
2. Press the buttons on the head restraint posts and pull up on the head restraint.
3. Route the top tether of the child restraint under the head restraint.
4. With the head restraint facing rearward, insert the head restraint posts into the holes in the top of the seatback.
5. Push the head restraint down.
6. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place.
7. When the child restraint is removed, reinstall the head restraint before the seating position is used.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93 for how and where to
Seats and Restraints 103
install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a seat belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
If the child restraint or vehicle seat position does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the seat belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint 0 92.
104 Seats and Restraints
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
For the third row outboard seating positions, if the head restraint interferes with the proper installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be removed. See "Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, check to see if the correct buckle is being used.
Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93.
7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If the head restraint was removed for a third row outboard seating position, reinstall it before the seating position is used. See "Head
Seats and Restraints 105
Restraint Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93 for additional information on reinstalling the head restraint properly.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Center Front Seat)
{ Warning
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position.
106 Seats and Restraints
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 92.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System 0 80 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 135 for more information, including important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 80 for additional information.
If the child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 93 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the OFF indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 135.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through
or around the child restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Seats and Restraints 107
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt, if needed.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
108 Seats and Restraints
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the OFF indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit, see "If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint" under Passenger Sensing System 0 80.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position.
Storage
Storage Compartments Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 109 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 110 Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Center Console Storage . . . . . . 110 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 111
Additional Storage Features Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Roof Rack System Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Storage Compartments
{ Warning
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.
Glove Box
Lift up the glove box handle to open it. Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box.
Cupholders
The cupholders are in front of the center console storage area.
Storage 109
Press the button to open the door, if equipped. If the cupholder door is closed, it will lock if the vehicle is in a crash. See your dealer to have the door unlocked. If equipped, cupholders are in the second and third row seat armrests.
110 Storage Sunglasses Storage
Rear Storage
Center Console Storage
If equipped, sunglasses storage is on the overhead console. Press the fixed button on the cover and release to access.
Armrest Storage
For vehicles with a rear seat armrest, pull the loop at the top of the armrest down to access the cupholders.
There is storage in the floor of the rear cargo area. Lift the handle to access. There is a removable divider to help organize.
Bench Seat
If equipped, pull the front center armrest down to access the storage area.
Storage 111 Floor Console Storage
Bench Seat
If equipped, pull the front center seat armrest down to access the storage area with cupholders.
Press the button and lift to open. There is a removable divider.
Bucket Seat
If equipped, press the latch and lift to open. Depending on the options there may be a tote compartment, accessory power outlet, auxiliary jack, and USB port(s) inside.
If equipped with front center seat storage, unlock with the ignition key, press the latch, and lift to open.
112 Storage
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
There are two cargo tie-downs in the rear cargo area. These can be used to strap cargo down and keep it from moving inside the vehicle.
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store small loads as far forward as possible. The net should not be used to store heavy loads.
Roof Rack System
{ Warning
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack -- like paneling, plywood, or a mattress -- the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM certified accessory carrier.
If equipped, the roof rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory. See your dealer for additional information.
Caution
Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 100 kg (220 lb) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Do not load cargo exceeding 100 kg (220 lbs) and always load cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails and does not block the vehicle lamps or windows. Fasten the cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle's center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located above the rear window glass. Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do not block or damage the CHMSL.
Storage 113
114 Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 115 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 116 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 116 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 116 Rear Window Wiper/ Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Transmission Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 133 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 134 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Charging System Light . . . . . . . 135 Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 136 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . 139 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 139 Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 140 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 140 Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 142 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 142
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 143 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 143 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 143 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 144 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . 147
Vehicle Messages Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Engine Power Messages . . . . . 151 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 152
Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 152
Universal Remote System Universal Remote System . . . . 160 Universal Remote System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Universal Remote System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls 115
Power Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
To adjust the tilt and telescoping steering wheel, if equipped:
1. Push the lever (1) down to move the steering wheel forward or rearward. Lift the lever (1) up to lock the wheel in place.
2. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever (2) toward you to move the steering wheel up or down. Release the lever (2) to lock the wheel into place.
To adjust the power tilt and telescoping steering wheel, if equipped:
Press the control to move the steering wheel up and down or forward and rearward.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
116 Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Controls Horn
The infotainment system can be operated by using the steering wheel controls. See "Steering Wheel Controls" in the infotainment manual.
To sound the horn, press a on the
steering wheel.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Heated Steering Wheel
( : If equipped, press to turn the
heated steering wheel on or off. A light next to the button displays when the feature is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start heating.
The windshield wiper control is on the turn signal lever.
The windshield wipers are controlled
by turning the band with z
FRONT on it.
1 : Fast wipes. w : Slow wipes. 3 INT : If Rainsense is turned off, turn the z FRONT band up for
more frequent wipes or down for
less frequent wipes. If Rainsense is
turned on, see Rainsense later in
this section.
OFF : Turns the windshield wipers off.
8 : For a single wipe, turn to 8,
then release. For several wipes,
hold the band on 8 longer.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 309.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. An internal circuit breaker to the motor will stop the motor until it cools down.
{ Warning
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
{ Warning
Before driving the vehicle, always clear snow and ice from the hood, windshield, roof, and rear of the vehicle, including all lamps and windows. Reduced visibility from snow and ice buildup could lead to a crash.
Wiper Parking
If the ignition is turned off while the
wipers are on w, 1, or 3 INT,
they will immediately stop.
If z FRONT is then moved to
OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield.
If the ignition is turned off while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing or Rainsense, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield.
Instruments and Controls 117
Rainsense
If equipped with Rainsense, a sensor near the top center of the windshield detects the amount of water on the windshield and controls the frequency of the windshield wiper.
Move the band out of the 3 INT
position to deactivate Rainsense.
Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.
3 INT : Turn the z FRONT
band on the wiper lever to adjust the
sensitivity when Rainsense is
turned on.
z AUTO : Press to turn
Rainsense on or off. When turned
on and z FRONT is in one of the
Rainsense wipe sensitivity positions the wipers can be adjusted for more or less sensitivity to moisture. When turned off, the wipers operate as timed intermittent wipers and can be adjusted for more or less frequent wipes.
. Turn the band up for more sensitivity to moisture.
. Turn the band down to lower INT setting for less sensitivity to moisture.
If z AUTO is turned on when the
ignition is turned on, or if the ignition
is in on and the z FRONT band
is in one of the sensitivity settings
118 Instruments and Controls
when z AUTO is turned on or off,
a message may display indicating if Rainsense was turned on or off.
If the ignition is in on and z
FRONT is not in one of the
sensitivity settings when z AUTO
is turned on, a message may display indicating that the wiper band must be in one of the sensitivity settings for Rainsense to operate.
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
When using an automatic car wash, move the windshield wiper lever to OFF. This disables the automatic Rainsense windshield wipers.
Windshield Washer
L m : Push the paddle marked with
the windshield washer symbol at the top of the turn signal lever to spray washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the paddle is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the paddle is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer had been activated. See Washer Fluid 0 302 for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Rear Window Wiper/ Washer
With Rainsense, if the transmission is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is very slow, the wipers will automatically stop at the base of the windshield.
The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased.
The rear wiper control is on the turn signal lever.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper position.
OFF : Turns the wiper off.
INT : Turns on the rear wiper with a delay between wipes.
ON : Turns on the rear wiper.
= REAR : Press this button on the
end of the lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold the button.
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper returns to the parked position and stops.
Rear Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
When using an automatic car wash, move the rear wiper control to OFF to disable the rear wiper. In some vehicles, if the transmission is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is very slow, the rear wiper will automatically park under the rear spoiler.
The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased.
Reverse Gear Wipes
If the rear wiper control is off, the rear wiper will automatically operate continuously when the shift lever is in R (Reverse), and the front windshield wiper is performing low or high speed wipes. If the rear wiper control is off, the shift lever is in R (Reverse), and the front windshield wiper is performing interval wipes, then the rear wiper automatically performs interval wipes.
This feature can be turned on or off. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
The windshield washer reservoir is used for the windshield and the rear window. Check the fluid level in the reservoir if either washer is not working. See Washer Fluid 0 302.
Instruments and Controls 119
Compass
Clock
The vehicle may have a compass display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The compass receives its heading and other information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and vehicle speed information.
The compass system is designed to operate for a certain number of miles or degrees of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the compass display shows CAL, drive the vehicle for a short distance in an open area where it can receive a GPS signal. The compass system will automatically determine when a GPS signal is restored and provide a heading again.
Setting the Time and Date with Center Stack Controls
To set the time or date:
1. Select SETTINGS from the Home Page, then select Time and Date.
2. Select the desired function.
3. Turn the MENU knob to increase or decrease the value.
4. Press the MENU knob to go to the next value. After the last value is selected, the system will update and return to the
Settings menu. Press o BACK
to go to the last menu and save the changes.
Auto Set requires an active OnStar or connected service plan.
If auto timing is set, the time displayed on the clock may not update immediately when driving into a new time zone.
120 Instruments and Controls
To set the clock display:
1. Select SETTINGS from the Home Page, then select Time and Date.
2. Select Clock Display.
3. Turn the MENU knob to Off or On.
4. Press the MENU knob to select.
Press o BACK to go to the last
menu and save the changes.
Setting the Time and Date with Infotainment Display Controls
To set the time:
1. Touch SETTINGS on the Home Page, then touch Time and Date.
2. Touch Set Time, then touch « or ª to increase or decrease
hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Touch 1224 Hr for 12 or 24 hour clock.
3. Touch S to go back to the
previous menu.
Auto Set requires an active OnStar or connected service plan.
If auto timing is set, the time displayed on the clock may not update immediately when driving into a new time zone.
To set the date:
1. Touch SETTINGS on the Home Page, then touch Time and Date.
2. Touch Set Date, then touch « or ª to increase or decrease
month, day, or year.
3. Touch S to go back to the
previous menu.
To set the clock display:
1. Touch SETTINGS on the Home Page, then touch Time and Date.
2. Touch Clock Display, then touch Off or On to turn the clock display off or on.
3. Touch S to go back to the
previous menu.
Power Outlets
Power Outlets 12-Volt Direct Current
Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone, MP3 player, etc.
The vehicle may have up to five accessory power outlets:
Vehicles with a Center Console
. One in front of the cupholders on the center console
. One inside the center storage console
. One on the rear of the center storage console
. One in the third row seat on the driver side
. One in the rear cargo area on the passenger side
Vehicles with Bench Seats
. One on the center stack below the climate control system
. One in the storage area on the bench seat
. One on the rear of the center armrest storage
. One in the third row seat area on the driver side
. One in the rear cargo area on the passenger side
Lift the cover to access and replace when not in use.
The accessory power outlets are powered as follows:
. The power outlet near the cupholders for vehicles with a center console or on the center stack for vehicles with bench seats, can be configured to operate using Retained Accessory Power (RAP) or battery power modes. If these power outlets are used while in the battery power mode, this could cause interference between the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and the vehicle, and the vehicle may not
Instruments and Controls 121
start. See Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 202 or Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 204.
. The power outlets in the third row seat area or in the rear cargo area are powered at all times. The power outlets inside the storage area, on the rear of the console, or on the bench seat are only powered when the ignition is on or in ACC/ ACCESSORY, or when RAP is active.
{ Warning
Power is always supplied to the outlet, if configured accordingly. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death.
Caution
Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the ignition is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 amp rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 280.
122 Instruments and Controls
Caution
Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.
Power Outlet 110/120-Volt Alternating Current
If equipped with this power outlet, it can be used to plug in electrical equipment that uses a maximum limit of 150 watts.
For vehicles with a center console, the 110/120-volt power outlet is on the rear of the center console.
For vehicles with bench seats, the 110/120-volt power outlet is on the center stack below the climate controls.
An indicator light on the outlet turns on to show it is in use. The light comes on when the ignition is on,
equipment requiring less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected.
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition is off or if the equipment is not fully seated into the outlet.
If equipment is connected using more than 150 watts or a system fault is detected, a protection circuit shuts off the power supply and the indicator light turns off. To reset the circuit, unplug the item and plug it back in or turn the ignition off and then back to on. The power restarts when equipment using 150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system fault is not detected.
The power outlet is not designed for the following, and may not work properly if they are plugged in:
. Equipment with high initial peak wattage, such as compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools
. Other equipment requiring an extremely stable power supply, such as
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets and touch sensor lamps
. Medical equipment
Wireless Charging
The vehicle may have wireless charging on top of the center console. See Center Console Storage 0 110. The system operates at 145 kHz and wirelessly charges one Qi compatible smartphone. The power output of the system is capable of charging at a rate up to 1 amp (5W), as requested by the compatible smartphone. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
{ Warning
Wireless charging can affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system.
The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. The wireless charging feature may not correctly indicate charging when the vehicle is in RAP. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 209.
The operating temperature is -20 °C (-4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for the charging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to 35 °C (95 °F) for the smartphone.
{ Warning
Remove all objects from the charging pad before charging your compatible smartphone. Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the smartphone and charging pad will become very hot. On the rare occasion that the charging system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the smartphone and charger, remove the
(Continued)
Instruments and Controls 123
Warning (Continued)
smartphone and allow the object to cool before removing it from the charging pad, to prevent burns.
2. Place the smartphone face up against the alignment rib on the charge pad.
To maximize the charge rate, ensure the smartphone is fully seated and centered in the holder with nothing under it. A thick smartphone case may prevent the wireless charger from working, or may reduce the charging performance. See your dealer for additional information.
To charge a compatible smartphone:
1. Remove all objects from the charging pad. The system may not charge if there are any objects between the smartphone and charging pad.
3. The } will appear on the V
on the infotainment display. This indicates that the smartphone is properly positioned and charging. If a smartphone is placed on the
charging pad and } does not
display, remove the smartphone from the pad, turn it 180 degrees, and wait three seconds before placing/ aligning the smartphone on the pad again.
124 Instruments and Controls
The smartphone may become warm during charging. This is normal. In warmer temperatures, the speed of charging may be reduced.
Software Acknowledgements
Certain Wireless Charging Module product from LG Electronics, Inc. ("LGE") contains the open source software detailed below. Refer to the indicated open source licenses (as are included following this notice) for the terms and conditions of their use.
OSS Notice Information
To obtain the source code that is contained in this product, please visit http://opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the product.
Freescale-WCT library
Copyright (c) 2012-2014 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.. All rights reserved.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
Instruments and Controls 125
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
126 Instruments and Controls Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar
Instruments and Controls 127
Denali English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar
128 Instruments and Controls
Cluster Menu
There is an interactive display area in the center of the instrument cluster.
. Info App. This is where the selected Driver Information Center (DIC) displays can be viewed. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
. Audio
. Phone
. Navigation
. Options
Audio
Use the right steering wheel control to open and scroll through the different items and displays.
Press o to access the cluster applications. Use w or x to scroll
through the list of available applications. Not all applications will be available on all vehicles.
Press V to select the Audio app, then press p to enter the Audio
menu. In the Audio menu browse for music, select from the favorites,
or change the audio source. Use w or x to change the station or go to
the next or previous track.
Phone
Press V to select the Phone app, then press p to enter the Phone
menu. In the Phone menu, if there is no active phone call, view recent calls, or scroll through contacts.
If there is an active call, mute the phone or switch to handset operation.
Navigation
Press V to select the Navigation app, then press p to enter the
Navigation menu. If there is no active route, you can resume the last route and turn the voice prompts on/off. If there is an active
route, press V to cancel or resume
route guidance or turn the voice prompts on or off.
Options
Press V to select the Options app, then press p to enter the Options menu. Use w or x to scroll
through items in the Options menu.
Units : Press p while Units is
displayed to enter the Units menu. Choose English or Metric units by
pressing V while the desired item is
highlighted. A checkmark will be displayed next to the selected item.
Display Themes (Denali) : There are three instrument cluster display configurations to choose from: Standard, Technology, and Media.
Info Pages : Press p while Info
Pages is displayed to enter the Info Pages menu and select the items to be displayed in the Info app. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation : If equipped, this feature allows for adjusting the angle of the HUD image. The vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press p on the steering
wheel controls while Head-up Display Rotation is highlighted to
enter Adjust Mode. Press w or x
to adjust the angle of the HUD
display. Press V to confirm and
save the setting. To cancel the
setting, press o.
Speed Warning : The Speed Warning display allows the driver to set a speed that they do not want to
Instruments and Controls 129
exceed. To set the Speed Warning,
press p when Speed Warning is
displayed. Enable the speed
warning and then use w or x to adjust the value. Press V to set the
speed. Once the speed is set, this feature can be turned off by
pressing V while viewing this page.
If the selected speed limit is exceeded, a pop-up warning is displayed with a chime.
Software Information : Displays open source software information.
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles. The odometer displays on the Speed page of the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
130 Instruments and Controls
Fuel Gauge
English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar
When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the tank. There is an arrow near the fuel gauge pointing to the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge takes a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on, and goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle should be refueled soon.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Metric Standard Theme
English Standard Theme
The engine oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure can vary with engine speed, outside temperature, and oil viscosity.
A reading outside the normal operating range can be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as
Instruments and Controls 131
soon as possible. An oil pressure message may display. See Engine Oil 0 289.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Caution
Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.
Metric Standard Theme
132 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Temperature Gauge
English Standard Theme
This gauge measures the temperature of the vehicle's engine coolant.
While driving under normal operating conditions, if the needle moves into the red warning area, the engine is too hot. Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
Metric Standard Theme
English Standard Theme
This gauge appears when the vehicle is in Tow/Haul Mode and shows the transmission fluid temperature. If the gauge is reading in the red area and/or a message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the vehicle must be stopped and the cause checked. One possible cause is a low fluid level in the transmission.
Caution Do not drive the vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating, or the transmission can be damaged. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by the warranty.
Voltmeter Gauge
Standard Theme When the ignition is on, this gauge indicates the battery voltage.
Instruments and Controls 133
When the engine is running, this gauge shows the condition of the charging system. The gauge can transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading. This is normal. If the vehicle is operating outside the normal operating range, the charging system light comes on. See Charging System Light 0 135 for more information. The voltmeter gauge may also read lower when in fuel economy mode. This is normal.
Readings outside the normal operating range can also occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power.
The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the readings outside the normal operating range. If the
vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner and unplug all chargers and accessories. Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Seat Belt Reminders
Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light There is a driver seat belt reminder light on the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several
134 Instruments and Controls
times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
If the driver seat belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on.
If the passenger seat belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.
Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light
There may be a passenger seat belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System 0 80.
The front passenger seat belt reminder light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt.
For vehicles equipped with the passenger seat belt reminder light, when the vehicle is started this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their seat belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s), passenger sensing system (if equipped), the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System 0 73.
The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 80 for important safety information. The passenger airbag status indicator is in the overhead console.
United States
Canada and Mexico When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbols for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
Instruments and Controls 135
after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or the on or off symbol, to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is allowed to inflate.
Warning (Continued)
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 134 for more information, including important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
Charging System Light
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong
(Continued)
The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the electrical charging
136 Instruments and Controls
system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, or is flashing, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message.
If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Malfunctions are often indicated by the system before any problem is noticeable. Being aware of the light and seeking service promptly when it comes on may prevent damage.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light)
This light is part of the vehicle's emission control on-board diagnostic system. If this light is on while the engine is running, a malfunction has been detected and the vehicle may require service. The light should come on to show that it is working when the ignition is in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 202 or Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 204.
Caution
If the vehicle is driven continually with this light on, the emission control system may not work as well, the fuel economy may be lower, and the vehicle may not run smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Modifications to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system, or the use of replacement tires that do not meet the original tire specifications, can cause this light to come on. This could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also affect the vehicle's ability to pass an Emissions Inspection/ Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications 0 283.
If the light is flashing : A malfunction has been detected that could damage the emission control system and increase vehicle emissions. Diagnosis and service may be required.
To help prevent damage, reduce vehicle speed and avoid hard accelerations and uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash, find a safe place to park. Turn the vehicle off and wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous guidelines and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is on steady : A malfunction has been detected. Diagnosis and service may be required.
Check the following:
. If fuel has been added to the vehicle using the capless fuel funnel adapter, make sure that it has been removed. See "Filling the Tank with a Portable Gas Can" under Filling the Tank 0 256. The diagnostic system can detect if the adapter has been left installed in the vehicle, allowing fuel to evaporate into
Instruments and Controls 137
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the adapter removed may turn off the light.
. Poor fuel quality can cause inefficient engine operation and poor driveability, which may go away once the engine is warmed up. If this occurs, change the fuel brand. It may require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Recommended Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine) 0 254 or Recommended Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine) 0 254.
If the light remains on, see your dealer.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
If the vehicle requires an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test, the test equipment will likely connect to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).
The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. Connecting devices that are not used to perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service the vehicle may affect vehicle operation. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 280. See your dealer if assistance is needed.
The vehicle may not pass inspection if:
. The light is on when the engine is running.
. The light does not come on when the ignition is in Service Mode.
. Critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. If this happens, the vehicle would not be ready for inspection and might require several days of routine driving
138 Instruments and Controls
before the system is ready for inspection. This can happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down, or if the vehicle has been recently serviced.
See your dealer if the vehicle will not pass or cannot be made ready for the test.
Brake System Warning Light
does not fully release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or the brake pedal may go closer to the floor. It could take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle 0 363.
{ Warning
Metric
English
This light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
When the vehicle is on, the brake system warning light also comes on when the parking brake is set. The light stays on if the parking brake
The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light should come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If the light does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If the light comes on while driving, safely stop as soon as it is possible and turn off the vehicle. Then turn on the vehicle again to reset the system. If the ABS warning light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light stays on. If the ABS warning light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but ABS is not functioning.
If both the ABS warning light and the brake system warning light are on, ABS is not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service. See Brake System Warning Light 0 138.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
The four-wheel-drive light comes on when the transfer case is shifted into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. LO or HI will also be next to this light when the vehicle is in four-wheel low or four-wheel high. Some delay between the shifting and the light coming on is normal. See Four-Wheel Drive 0 219.
Instruments and Controls 139
Tow/Haul Mode Light
If available, this light is white if LKA is turned on, but not ready to assist. This light is green if LKA is turned on and is ready to assist.
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Mode feature, this light comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode has been activated.
See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light
LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. The LKA light is amber when assisting.
This light flashes amber as a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, to indicate that the lane marking has been crossed.
LKA will not assist or alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if LKA detects that you are accelerating, braking, or actively steering.
See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 251.
After the vehicle is started, this light turns off and stays off if LKA has not been turned on or is unavailable.
140 Instruments and Controls Vehicle Ahead Indicator Traction Off Light
StabiliTrak OFF Light
If equipped, this indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected ahead and amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 245.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off.
The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off by pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak/ESC button.
This light and the StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light come on when StabiliTrak/ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is turned off.
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
This light comes on when the StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is turned off. If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off.
If StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS are off, the system does not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak/ESC systems, and the warning light turns off.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If the light does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off. If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ ESC system have been disabled. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display. Check the DIC messages to determine which feature(s) is no longer functioning and whether the vehicle requires service. If the light is on and flashing, the TCS and/or the StabiliTrak/ESC system is actively working.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off.
Instruments and Controls 141
Caution (Continued)
engine and it may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Engine Overheating 0 300.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated. If this happens, pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating 0 300.
Tire Pressure Light
Caution
The engine coolant temperature warning light indicates that the vehicle has overheated. Driving with this light on can damage the
(Continued)
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS.
142 Instruments and Controls
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 333.
When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on at every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 336.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
Caution
Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and might have some other system problem. See your dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light is near the fuel gauge and comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to show it is working. It also comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. The light turns off when fuel is added. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.
This light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Security Light
High-Beam On Light
Instruments and Controls 143 Front Fog Lamp Light
The security light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.
If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation (Key Access) 0 36 or Immobilizer Operation (Keyless Access) 0 36.
This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 0 166. IntelliBeam Light
This light comes on when the IntelliBeam system, if equipped, is enabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.
For vehicles with fog lamps, this light comes on when the fog lamps are on. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps 0 169.
Lamps On Reminder
This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use, except when only the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 164.
144 Instruments and Controls
Cruise Control Light
Door Ajar Light
The cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active.
See Cruise Control 0 230.
Adaptive Cruise Control Light
This light comes on when a door is open or not securely latched. Before driving, check that all doors are properly closed.
Information Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC displays are shown in the center of the instrument cluster in the Info app. See Instrument Cluster 0 126. The displays show the status of many vehicle systems. The controls for the DIC are on the right steering wheel control.
This light is white when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is on and ready, and turns green when the ACC is set and active. See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 232.
w or x : Press to move up or
down in a list.
o or p : Press to move between
the interactive display zones in the cluster.
V : Press to open a menu or select
a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens.
DIC Info Page Options
The info pages on the DIC can be turned on or off through the Options menu.
1. Press o to access the cluster
applications.
2. Press w or x to scroll to the
Options application.
3. Press V to enter the
Options menu.
4. Scroll to Info Pages and
press p.
5. Press w or x to move
through the list of possible information displays.
Instruments and Controls 145
6. Press V while an item is
highlighted to select or deselect that item. When an item is selected, a checkmark will appear next to it.
DIC Info Pages
The following is the list of all possible DIC info page displays. Some may not be available for your particular vehicle. Some items may not be turned on by default but can be turned on through the Options app. See "DIC Info Page Options" earlier in this section.
Speed : Shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). The vehicle odometer is also shown on this page.
Trip A or Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, and Average Speed : Shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset.
The Average Fuel Economy display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number reflects only the approximate average fuel economy that the vehicle has right now, and will change as driving conditions change.
The Average Speed display shows the average speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value.
Press and hold V while this display
is active to reset the trip odometer,
the average fuel economy, and the
average speed. Or press p and
select reset in the menu.
Fuel Range and Instantaneous Fuel Economy : Shows the approximate distance the vehicle
146 Instruments and Controls
can be driven without refueling. LOW will be displayed when the vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. It also shows if the Active Fuel Management is active and in V4 mode, or inactive and in V8 mode. See Active Fuel Management 0 211.
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy display shows the current fuel economy in either liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number reflects only the approximate fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently as driving conditions change.
Timer and Fuel Used : Can be used as a timer. To start the timer,
press V while this display is active.
The display will show the amount of
time that has passed since the timer
was last reset. To stop the timer,
press V briefly while this display is
active and the timer is running. To
reset the timer to zero, press and
hold V while this display is active.
This also shows the number of liters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item.
Oil Life : Shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil 0 289. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
The Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Do not to reset the Oil Life display at any time other than when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, press and
hold V for several seconds while
the Oil Life display is active. See
Engine Oil Life System 0 291.
Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 335 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 336.
Best Fuel Economy : Displays average fuel economy, the best fuel economy over the selected distance, and a bar graph showing instantaneous fuel economy.
Press p to change the selected
distance. Press and hold V while
this display is active to reset the
best fuel economy and average fuel
economy. This display can also be
reset by selecting reset in the menu.
Top Consumers : Shows a list of the features that are currently impacting the fuel economy, in order from highest to lowest. If a feature is turned off, it will be removed from the list.
Economy Trend : Shows history of the Average Fuel Economy from the last 50 km (30 mi). Each bar represents about 5 km (3 mi) of driving. During driving the bars will shift to always reflect the most recent distance on the right side.
Press and hold V to clear the graph
or press p to reset through
the menu.
ECO Index : Provides feedback on the efficiency of current driving behavior. The bar graph shows a value that is based on current fuel consumption compared to what is expected from the vehicle with good and bad driving habits. It also shows if the Active Fuel Management is
Instruments and Controls 147
active and in V4 mode, or inactive and in V8 mode. See Active Fuel Management 0 211.
Engine Hours : Shows the total number of hours the engine has run. This display also shows the engine idle hours.
Following Distance : Used to select the alert timing for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA). See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 245.
Blank Page : Shows no information.
Trailer Brake : Displays on vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting.
Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge : Shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display if a trailer is not connected.
Speed Signs : Shows sign information, which comes from a roadway database in the onboard navigation.
Off Road : Displays vehicle pitch and roll information, road wheel angle, and four-wheel drive (4WD) status.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{ Warning
If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view.
If equipped with HUD, some information concerning the operation of the vehicle is projected
148 Instruments and Controls
onto the windshield. The information is projected through the HUD lens on the driver side of the instrument panel and focused out toward the front of the vehicle.
Caution
If you try to use the HUD image as a parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as a parking aid.
The HUD information can be displayed in various languages. The speedometer reading and other numerical values can be displayed in either English or metric units.
The language selection is changed through the radio and the units of measurement is changed through the instrument cluster. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152 and "Options" under Instrument Cluster 0 126.
HUD Display on the Windshield
The HUD may display some of the following vehicle information and vehicle messages or alerts:
. Speed
. Tachometer
. Audio
. Phone
. Navigation
. Collision Alert
. Adaptive Cruise Control and set speed
. Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keep Assist
. Low Fuel Some vehicle messages or alerts displayed in the HUD may be cleared by using the steering wheel controls. See Vehicle Messages 0 151.
The HUD control is to the left of the steering wheel. To adjust the HUD image: 1. Adjust the driver seat. 2. Start the engine. 3. Use the following settings to
adjust the HUD.
$ : Press or lift to center the HUD
image. The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, not side to side.
! : Press to select the display
view. Each press will change the display view.
D : Lift and hold to brighten the
display. Press and hold to dim the display. Continue to hold to turn the display off.
The HUD image will automatically dim and brighten to compensate for outside lighting. The HUD brightness control can also be adjusted as needed.
The HUD image can temporarily light up depending on the angle and position of sunlight on the HUD display. This is normal.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see.
Head-Up Display (HUD) Rotation Option
This feature allows for adjusting the angle of the HUD image.
If equipped, this feature allows for adjusting the angle of the HUD
image. Press p on the steering
wheel controls while Head-up
Instruments and Controls 149
Display Rotation is highlighted to
enter Adjust Mode. Press w or x
to adjust the angle of the HUD
display. Press V to confirm and
save the setting. To cancel the
setting, press o. The vehicle must
be in P (Park). See Instrument Cluster 0 126.
HUD Views
There are four views in the HUD. Some vehicle information and vehicle messages or alerts may be displayed in any view.
English
Speed View : This displays digital speed in English or metric units, speed limit, vehicle ahead indicator, Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keep Assist, and Adaptive Cruise Control and set speed. Some information only appears on vehicles that have these features, and when they are active.
Metric
Metric
150 Instruments and Controls
English
Audio/Phone View : This displays digital speed, indicators from speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radio station, media type, and incoming calls will be displayed.
All HUD views may briefly display audio information when the steering wheel controls are used to adjust the audio settings appearing in the instrument cluster.
Incoming phone calls may display in any HUD view.
Metric
English Navigation View : This displays digital speed, indicators from speed view along with Turn-by-Turn Navigation information in some vehicles. The compass heading is displayed when navigation routing is not active. Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alerts shown in the instrument cluster may also be displayed in any HUD view.
Metric
English Performance View : This displays digital speed, indicators from speed view along with rpm reading, transmission positions, and gear shift indicator (if equipped). Care of the HUD Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that could reduce the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image. Clean the HUD lens with a soft cloth sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dry it.
HUD Troubleshooting
If you cannot see the HUD image when the ignition is on, check that:
. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.
. The HUD brightness setting is not too dim or too bright.
. The HUD is adjusted to the proper height.
. Polarized sunglasses are not worn.
. The windshield and HUD lens are clean.
If the HUD image is not correct, contact your dealer.
The windshield is part of the HUD system. See Windshield Replacement 0 310.
Instruments and Controls 151
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.
The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by
pressing V. The messages that
require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed.
All messages should be taken seriously; clearing the message does not correct the problem.
If a SERVICE message appears, see your dealer.
Follow the instructions given in the messages. The system displays messages regarding the following topics:
. Service Messages
. Fluid Levels
. Vehicle Security
. Brakes . Steering . Ride Control Systems . Driver Assistance Systems . Cruise Control . Lighting and Bulb Replacement . Wiper/Washer Systems . Doors and Windows . Seat Belts . Airbag Systems . Engine and Transmission . Tire Pressure . Battery
Engine Power Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle's propulsion power is reduced. A reduction in propulsion power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no observed reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may
152 Instruments and Controls
be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven while this message is on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, or displays repeatedly, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
Under certain operating conditions, propulsion will be disabled. Try restarting after the vehicle has been off for 30 seconds.
Vehicle Speed Messages
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/ H (MPH)
Vehicle Personalization
Use the audio system controls to access the personalization menus for customizing vehicle features.
The following are all possible personalization features. Depending on the vehicle, some may not be available.
Radio Audio System Controls
1. Touch the desired feature to display a list of available options.
2. Select the desired feature setting.
This message shows that the vehicle speed has been limited to the speed displayed. The limited speed is a protection for various propulsion and vehicle systems, such as lubrication, thermal, brakes, suspension, Teen Driver if equipped, or tires.
3. Press o BACK on the center stack or touch S to return to
the previous menu or exit.
Turn the vehicle on to access the Settings menu, then select SETTINGS from the Home Page on the infotainment display.
Personalization Menus
The following list of menu items may be available: . Time and Date . Rear Seat Reminder . Language . Video Voice-Over . Valet Mode . Teen Driver . Radio . Vehicle . Bluetooth . Apple CarPlay . Android Auto . Voice . Display . Rear Camera . Return to Factory Settings . Software Information . Wi-Fi
Detailed information for each menu follows.
Time and Date
Manually set the time and date. See Clock 0 119.
Rear Seat Reminder
This allows for a chime and a message when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle.
Select Off or On.
Language
Select Language, then select from the available language(s).
The selected language will display on the system, and voice recognition (if equipped) will reflect the selected language.
Video Voice-Over
When activated, the Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system will read aloud menu titles, menu listings, pop-ups, alerts, and file titles from audio and video media.
Select Off or On.
Instruments and Controls 153
Valet Mode
This will lock the infotainment system and steering wheel controls. It may also limit access to vehicle storage locations, if equipped.
. Bose AudioPilot . Auto Volume . Maximum Startup Volume . Audio Cue Volume
To enable valet mode:
Manage Favorites
1. Enter a four-digit code on the keypad.
2. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen.
3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
Touch Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the system. Touch Back to go back to the previous menu.
Teen Driver
See "Teen Driver" under "Settings" in the infotainment manual.
Radio
Select and the following may display: . Manage Favorites . Number of Favorites Shown . Audible Touch Feedback
This allows favorites to be edited. See "Manage Favorites" in "Settings" under "Radio" in the infotainment manual.
Number of Favorites Shown
Select to set the number of favorites to display.
Select the desired number or select Auto and the infotainment system will automatically adjust the number of favorites shown.
Audible Touch Feedback
This allows Audible Touch Feedback to be turned on or off.
Select Off or On.
Bose AudioPilot
This allows Bose AudioPilot to be turned on or off.
154 Instruments and Controls
Select Off or On.
. Collision/Detection Systems
Auto Volume
This feature adjusts the volume based on vehicle speed and ambient noise.
Select Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, or High.
. Comfort and Convenience . Lighting . Power Door Locks . Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Climate and Air Quality
Maximum Startup Volume
This feature sets the maximum startup volume. If the vehicle is started and the volume is greater than this level, the volume is adjusted to this level. To set the maximum startup volume, touch + or - to increase or decrease.
Audio Cue Volume
Select and the following may display: . Auto Fan Speed . Auto Defog . Auto Rear Defog
Auto Fan Speed
This feature will set the auto fan speed.
This feature sets the volume of audio files played at system startup and shutdown.
Select On, then touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume.
Vehicle
Select and the following may display:
Select Low, Medium, or High.
Auto Defog
When set to On, the auto defog comes on when the climate control sensor detects high interior humidity. Air will be directed to the windshield.
Select Off or On.
. Climate and Air Quality
Auto Rear Defog
This feature will automatically turn on the rear window defogger when the vehicle is first started in cold weather and turn off when the vehicle is warmed.
Select Off or On.
Collision/Detection Systems
Select and the following may display:
. Alert Type
. Forward Collision System
. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier
. Park Assist
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert
. Lane Change Alert
Alert Type
This feature will set crash alerts to beeps or seat vibrations. This setting affects all crash alerts including Forward Collision Alert, Lane Departure Warning, and Park Assist alerts.
Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.
Forward Collision System
This setting controls the vehicle response when detecting a vehicle ahead of you. The Off setting disables all FCA and AEB functions. With the Alert and Brake setting, both FCA and AEB are available. The Alert setting disables AEB. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 0 248.
Select Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.
Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier
This feature will give a reminder that Adaptive Cruise Control provides when it has brought the vehicle to a complete stop behind another stopping vehicle, and then that vehicle drives on.
Select Off or On.
Park Assist
This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 242.
Select Off, On, or On with Towbar Attached.
Instruments and Controls 155
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Auto Power Assist Steps
This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 242.
This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Power Assist Steps 0 32.
Select Off or On.
Select Off, On, or Extended.
Lane Change Alert
Auto Memory Recall
This allows the feature to be turned on or off. See Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 250.
Select Off or On.
Comfort and Convenience
Select and the following may display: . Auto Power Assist Steps . Auto Memory Recall . Easy Exit Options . Chime Volume . Hands Free Liftgate Control . Reverse Tilt Mirror . Auto Mirror Folding . Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
This feature automatically recalls the current driver's previously stored 1 or 2 button positions when the ignition is changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY. See Memory Seats 0 51.
Select Off or On.
Easy Exit Options
This feature automatically recalls the previously stored Exit button position when exiting the vehicle. See Memory Seats 0 51.
Select Off or On.
Chime Volume
This allows the selection of the chime volume level.
Touch + or - to adjust the volume.
156 Instruments and Controls
Hands Free Liftgate Control
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
The liftgate may be operated with a kicking motion under the rear bumper. See Liftgate 0 27.
Select Off, On-Open and Close, or On-Open Only.
When on and the front wiper is on and wiping, the rear wiper will automatically activate when the vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse).
Select Off or On.
Reverse Tilt Mirror
When on, the driver and/or passenger mirrors will tilt downward when the vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) to improve visibility of the ground near the rear wheels. See Reverse Tilt Mirrors 0 40.
Select Off, On - Driver and Passenger, On - Driver, or On Passenger.
Auto Mirror Folding
When on, the outside mirrors will automatically fold or unfold when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter Q or K button is
pressed and held. See Folding Mirrors 0 38.
Select Off or On.
Lighting
Select the Lighting menu and the following may display:
. Vehicle Locator Lights
. Exit Lighting
Vehicle Locator Lights
This feature will flash the exterior lamps and allows some of the exterior lamps and most of the interior lamps to turn on briefly when
K on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed to locate the vehicle.
Select On or Off.
Exit Lighting
This allows the selection of how long the exterior lamps stay on when leaving the vehicle when it is dark outside.
Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
Power Door Locks
Select Power Door Locks and the following may display:
. Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
. Auto Door Unlock
. Delayed Door Lock
Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
When on, this feature will keep the driver door from locking when the door is open and the key is in the ignition. If Off is selected, the Delayed Door Lock menu will be available.
Select Off or On.
Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
Delayed Door Lock
When on, this feature will delay the locking of the doors. To override the delay, press the power door lock switch on the door.
Select Off or On.
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Select and the following may display: . Remote Unlock Light Feedback . Remote Lock Feedback . Remote Door Unlock . Remote Start Auto Cool Seats . Remote Start Auto Heat Seats . Passive Door Unlock . Passive Door Lock . Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, the exterior lamps will flash when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Select Off or Flash Lights.
Instruments and Controls 157
Remote Lock Feedback
Passive Door Unlock
This allows selection of what type of feedback is given when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights Only, or Horn Only.
This allows the selection of what doors will unlock when using the button on the driver door to unlock the vehicle.
Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
Remote Door Unlock
Passive Door Lock
This allows selection of which doors
will unlock when pressing K on the
RKE transmitter.
Select All Doors or Driver Door.
Remote Start Auto Cool Seats
If turned on, this feature will turn the ventilated seats on when using remote start on warm days.
Select Off or On.
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
If turned on, this feature will turn the heated seats on when using remote start on cold days.
Select Off or On.
This allows passive locking to be turned on or off and selects feedback. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
Select Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.
Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
This feature sounds an alert when the RKE transmitter is left in the vehicle. This menu also enables Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert.
Select Off or On.
158 Instruments and Controls
Bluetooth
Select and the following may display:
. Pair New Device
. Device Management
. Ringtones
. Voice Mail Numbers
. Text Message Alerts
Pair New Device
Select to pair a new device. See "Pairing" in "Infotainment Controls" under "Bluetooth" in the infotainment manual.
Device Management
Select to connect to a different phone source, disconnect a phone, or delete a phone.
Ringtones
Select to change the ring tone for the specific phone. The phone does not need to be connected to change the ring tone.
Voice Mail Numbers
This feature displays the voice mail number for all connected phones. To change the voice mail number, select EDIT. Type a new number, then select Save.
Text Message Alerts
This allows the feature to be turned on or off.
Select Off or On.
Apple CarPlay
Select and the following may display: . Apple CarPlay . Manage Apple CarPlay Devices
Apple CarPlay
This feature allows Apple devices to be connected to the infotainment system through a USB port.
Select Off or On.
Manage Apple CarPlay Devices
Select to manage Apple devices. Apple CarPlay must be on for this feature to be accessed.
Android Auto
Select and the following may display: . Android Auto . Manage Android Auto Devices
Android Auto
This feature allows Android devices to be connected to the infotainment system through a USB port.
Select Off or On.
Manage Android Auto Devices
Select to manage Android devices. Android Auto must be on for this feature to be accessed.
Voice
Select and the following may display: . Confidence Threshold . Prompt Length . Audio Feedback Speed . Display "What Can I Say?" Tips
Confidence Threshold
This feature allows the adjustment of the sensitivity of the speech recognition system.
Select Confirm More or Confirm Less.
Prompt Length
This feature adjusts the voice prompt length.
Select Short or Long.
Audio Feedback Speed
This feature adjusts the audio feedback speed.
Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
Display "What Can I Say?" Tips
This feature gives voice command tips.
Select Off or On.
Instruments and Controls 159
Display
Rear Camera
Select and the following may display: . Mode . Calibrate Touchscreen . Turn Display Off
Select and the following may display: . Guidance Lines . Rear Cross Traffic Alert . Rear Park Assist Symbols
Mode
Guidance Lines
Select to change the display of the infotainment system.
Select Auto, Day, or Night.
Calibrate Touchscreen
Select to calibrate the touchscreen, then follow the prompts.
Select to turn Off or On. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 242.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Select to turn Off or On.
Rear Park Assist Symbols
Turn Display Off
Select to turn the display off. Touch anywhere on the infotainment display or press any infotainment controls on the center stack to turn the display on.
Select to turn Off or On. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 242.
Return to Factory Settings
Select and the following may display: . Restore Vehicle Settings . Clear All Private Data . Restore Radio Settings
160 Instruments and Controls
Restore Vehicle Settings This allows selection of restoring vehicle settings. Select Restore or Cancel.
Clear All Private Data
Wi-Fi
Select and the following may display: . Wi-Fi . Manage Wi-Fi Networks
This allows selection to clear all private information from the vehicle.
Select Delete or Cancel.
Wi-Fi
This feature allows Wi-Fi networks to be turned off or on.
Restore Radio Settings
Select Off or On.
This allows selection to restore radio settings. Select Restore or Cancel.
Software Information
Manage Wi-Fi Networks
Select to manage Wi-Fi networks. Wi-Fi must be on for this feature to be accessed.
Select to view or update the infotainment system current software information.
Universal Remote System
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
Universal Remote System Programming
If equipped, these buttons are in the overhead console. This system can replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. These
instructions refer to a garage door opener, but can be used for other devices.
Do not use the Universal Remote system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read these instructions completely before programming the Universal Remote system. It may help to have another person assist with the programming process.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming. Erase the programming when vehicle ownership is terminated. See "Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons" later in this section.
To program a garage door opener, park outside directly in line with and facing the garage door opener receiver. Clear all people and objects near the garage door.
Instruments and Controls 161
Make sure the hand-held transmitter has a new battery for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Remote System
For questions or programming help, see www.homelink.com/gm or call 1-800-355-3515. For calls placed outside the U.S.A, Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone.
Programming involves time-sensitive actions, and may time out causing the procedure to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the Universal Remote system buttons with the indicator light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener receiver.
2. At the same time, press and hold both the hand-held transmitter button and one of the three Universal Remote system buttons to be used to operate the garage door. Do not release either button until the indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. Then release both buttons.
Some garage door openers may require substitution of Step 2 with the procedure under "Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators" later in this section.
3. Press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for five seconds while watching the indicator light and garage door activation.
. If the indicator light stays on continuously or the garage door moves when the button is pressed, then programming is complete. There is no need to complete Steps 46.
162
.
.
Instruments and Controls
If the indicator light does
not come on or the garage
door does not move, a
second button press may
be required. For a second
time, press and hold the
newly programmed button
for five seconds. If the light
stays on or the garage door
moves, programming is
complete.
4.
If the indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds,
then changes to a solid light
and the garage door does
not move, continue with
programming Steps 46.
5.
6.
Learn or Smart Button
After completing Steps 13, locate the Learn or Smart button inside the garage on the garage door opener receiver. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Press and release the Learn or Smart button. Step 6 must be completed within 30 seconds of pressing this button.
Inside the vehicle, press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for three seconds and then release it. If the garage door does not move or the lamp on the garage door opener receiver does not flash,
press and hold the same button a second time for three seconds then release it. Again, if the door does not move or the garage door lamp does not flash, press and hold the same button a third time for three seconds, then release it.
The Universal Remote system should now activate the garage door.
Repeat the process for programming the two remaining buttons.
Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators
For questions or programming help, see www.homelink.com/gm or call 1-800-355-3515. For calls placed outside the U.S.A, Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone.
Some radio-frequency laws and gate operators require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission.
This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal during programming.
If the programming did not work, replace Step 2 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" with the following:
Press and hold the Universal Remote system button while pressing and releasing the hand-held transmitter button every two seconds until the signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Remote system. The Universal Remote system indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" to complete.
Instruments and Controls 163
Universal Remote System Operation
Using the Universal Remote System
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Remote system button for at least one-half second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons
Erase all programmed buttons when vehicle ownership is terminated.
Reprogramming a Single Universal Remote System Button
To reprogram any of the system buttons:
1. Press and hold any one of the buttons. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 1 under "Programming the Universal Remote System."
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. This should take about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
164 Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 164 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 168 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Lighting Features Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Battery Load Management . . . 172 Battery Power Protection . . . . . 172 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp control is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. There are four positions:
O : Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to O again to turn the
automatic headlamps or DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
AUTO : Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, roof marker lamps (if equipped), and license plate lamps.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps, except the headlamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps with
the parking lamps and instrument panel lights.
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before turning off to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the headlamp control off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes.
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. IntelliBeam System If equipped, this system turns the vehicle's high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions. The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.
This light comes on in the instrument cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled.
Lighting 165
Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam
To enable the IntelliBeam system, activate the high/low-beam changer on then off within two seconds while the exterior lamp control is in AUTO
or 2.
Driving with IntelliBeam
The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph).
The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on.
There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:
. The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps.
166 Lighting
. The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps.
. The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.
. The vehicle's speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).
. The IntelliBeam system can be disabled by the High/Low-Beam Changer or the Flash-to-Pass feature. If this happens, the High/Low-Beam Changer must be activated on then off within two seconds to reactivate the IntelliBeam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the IntelliBeam is reactivated. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 0 166 and Flash-to-Pass 0 167.
The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:
. The other vehicle's lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
. The other vehicle's lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.
. The other vehicle's lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.
. The vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.
. The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.
. The vehicle is being driven on winding or hilly roads.
The automatic high-beam headlamps may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
A reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on, the ignition is off, and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the lamps off.
Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer
Push the turn signal lever toward the instrument panel to change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward you and release it to return to low-beam headlamps.
When the high-beam headlamps are on, this indicator light on the instrument cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then release it.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. Depending on the type of headlamp, they will either turn off after a short duration or stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to normal operation.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of the vehicle during the day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system comes on when the following conditions are met:
. The ignition is on.
. The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
. The transmission is not in P (Park).
. The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL system is on, only the DRL are on. The taillamps, sidemarker lamps, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp system switches from DRL to the headlamps.
Lighting 167
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
lamp control to O and then release.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, off will only work when the vehicle is parked.
Automatic Headlamp System
When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.
There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor, otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed.
168 Lighting
The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. If it is light outside when the vehicle leaves the garage, there is a slight delay before the automatic headlamp system changes to the DRL. During that delay, the instrument cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 170.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp
control is turned to O or the ignition
is off.
Lights On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off.
Move the exterior lamp control to O or ; to disable this feature.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| : Press this button to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's turn signals will not work.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the turn signal lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times. It will flash six times if Tow/ Haul Mode is active. Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until the lever is released.
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be burned out.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers 0 315.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal. The message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC). To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Lighting 169 Fog Lamps
If equipped with fog lamps, the button is on the exterior lamp control, to the left of the steering column. The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to come on.
# : Press to turn the fog lamps on
or off. A light will come on in the instrument cluster. When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps automatically turn on.
170 Lighting
When the headlamps are changed to high beam, the fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on with the fog lamps.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination Control
Dome Lamps
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and is next to the exterior lamp control.
D : Move the thumbwheel up or
down to brighten or dim the lights.
There are dome lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped.
To change the dome lamp settings, press the following:
OFF : Turns the lamps off, even when a door is open.
DOOR : The lamps come on automatically when a door is opened.
ON : Turns all dome lamps on.
Reading Lamps
There are reading lamps in the overhead console and the headliner, if equipped. To operate, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY or using Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
Press m or n next to each reading
lamp to turn it on or off.
Lighting 171
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
Some exterior lamps and the interior lamps turn on briefly at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when K
is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is opened, the interior lamps come on if the dome lamp control is in the DOOR position. After about 30 seconds the exterior lamps turn off. Entry lighting can be disabled manually by changing the ignition out of the OFF position, or by
pressing the RKE transmitter Q
button.
This feature can be changed. See "Vehicle Locator Lights" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Exit Lighting
Some exterior lamps and interior lamps come on at night, or in areas with limited lighting, when the driver door is opened after the ignition is turned off. The exterior lamps and
172 Lighting
interior lamps remain on for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off.
The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off.
This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Battery Load Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM), which estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. The voltmeter gauge or the voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped, may show the voltage
moving up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC message might be displayed and it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
Battery Power Protection
This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep the battery from running down.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn the exterior lamp control
to the O position and then back to the ; or 2 position.
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the ignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY.
Lighting 173
174 Infotainment System
Infotainment System
Introduction Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Introduction
Infotainment
See the infotainment manual for information on the radio, audio players, phone, navigation system, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE), and voice or speech recognition, if equipped. It also includes information on settings.
Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)
If equipped, ANC reduces engine noise in the vehicle's interior. ANC requires the factory-installed audio system, radio, speakers, amplifier (if equipped), induction system, and exhaust system to work properly. Deactivation is required by your dealer if related aftermarket equipment is installed.
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Air Vents Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled. Some climate control settings can be changed. See "Climate and Air Quality" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
1. Driver Temperature Control 2. A/C (Air Conditioning)
Climate Controls 175
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls
4. Fan Control
5. Defrost
6. Passenger Temperature Control
7. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature)
8. Rear Window Defogger
9. RCTRL (Rear Climate Control Lockout)
10. Rear Temperature Control
11. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control
12. Rear Fan Control
13. Front Climate Control Power Button
14. Rear AUTO (Automatic Operation)
15. Rear Climate Control Power Button
16. Air Recirculation
17. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
176 Climate Controls
Front Climate Controls
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.
When AUTO is lit, all four functions operate automatically. Each function can also be manually set and the setting is displayed. Functions not manually set will continue to be automatically controlled, even if the AUTO indicator is not lit.
To place the system in automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the driver and passenger temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with 22 °C (72 °F) and allow the system time to stabilize. Then adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort.
To improve fuel efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather.
The recirculation light will not come on when automatically controlled.
Press @ to manually select
recirculation; press it again to select outside air.
Do not cover the solar sensor on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load. See "Sensors" later in this section.
Manual Operation
O : Press to turn the climate control
system on or off. When off is selected, the system will stop air from flowing into the cabin. If on is selected, a button is pressed, or a knob is turned, the climate control system will turn on and operate at the current setting.
9 : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
The maximum auto fan speed can be adjusted. See "Climate and Air Quality" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control : The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and passenger.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the driver or passenger temperature setting.
SYNC : Press to link the passenger and rear climate temperature settings to the driver setting. The SYNC indicator light will turn on. When the passenger or rear climate settings are adjusted, the SYNC indicator light turns off.
Air Delivery Mode Control : Press
Y, \, [ , or - to change the
direction of the airflow. An indicator
light comes on in the selected mode
button.
Changing the mode cancels the automatic operation of the mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
Y : Air is directed to the instrument
panel outlets.
\ : Air is divided between the
instrument panel and floor outlets.
[ : Air is directed to the floor
outlets, with some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets.
- : This mode clears the windows
of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
0 : Press to clear the windshield
of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and the side window vents. The system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and the air conditioning
compressor will run, unless the outside temperature is close to freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
See Air Vents 0 180.
A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is enabled. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run. The A/C light will stay on even if the outside temperatures are below freezing.
@ : Press to turn on recirculation.
An indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated.
Auto Defog : The climate control system uses a sensor to automatically detect high humidity inside the vehicle. When high humidity is detected, the climate control system may adjust to
Climate Controls 177
outside air supply, turn on the air conditioner, and direct more air to the windshield. If the climate control system does not detect possible window fogging, it returns to normal operation. To turn Auto Defog off or on, see "Climate and Air Quality" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
K : Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is on. The defogger turns off if the ignition is turned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.
The rear window defogger can be set to automatic operation. When Auto Rear Defog is selected, the rear window defogger turns on automatically when the vehicle is first started in cold weather and turns off when the vehicle is
178 Climate Controls
warmed. To turn Auto Rear Defog on or off, see "Climate and Air Quality" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Caution
Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Heated Mirror : If equipped with heated outside mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed. See Heated Mirrors 0 39.
Rear Climate Controls
O : Press to turn the rear climate
control system on or off.
AUTO : Press AUTO to control the rear passenger temperature, air delivery, and fan speed. AUTO appears in the display when
automatic operation is active. If any of the climate control settings except rear temperature are manually adjusted, this cancels full automatic operation.
Fan Control : Press up or down to increase or decrease the rear passenger area fan speed.
Air Delivery Mode Control : Press up or down to change the direction of the rear passenger airflow. Repeatedly press the switch until the desired mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections.
Temperature Control : Press up or down to increase or decrease the airflow temperature into the rear passenger area.
RCTRL : Press to lock or unlock control of the rear climate control system from the rear seat passengers. When locked, the rear climate control can only be adjusted from the front seat.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation If equipped with the remote start feature, the climate control system will come on when the vehicle is started remotely, depending on the outside temperature. The rear window defogger and heated seats, if equipped, may also come on. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 23 and Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 54. Sensors
The solar sensor monitors the solar heat. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle, including a snowplow, could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
Rear Climate Control System
The rear climate control system is located on the rear of the center console storage. The rear climate settings can be adjusted with this system.
1. Fan Control
2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
3. MODE (Air Delivery Mode Control)
4. TEMP (Temperature Control)
5. Heated Rear Seats (If Equipped)
If the dual automatic climate control system rear climate control lockout feature is locked, the rear climate control settings can only be adjusted from the front seat.
Climate Controls 179
Automatic Operation
AUTO : Press AUTO to automatically control the temperature, air delivery, and fan speed for rear seat passengers. A is indicated in the display when automatic operation is active.
If any of the rear climate control settings are manually adjusted, full automatic operation is cancelled. Press AUTO to return to full automatic operation.
The display only indicates climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode.
Manual Operation
9 : Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn completely counterclockwise to turn the fan/power off.
TEMP : Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature into the passenger area. If the SYNC button is pressed on the front
180 Climate Controls
climate controls, the rear climate temperature is linked to the driver temperature setting.
MODE : Press to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections.
M or L : If equipped, press M or L
to heat the left or right outboard seat
cushion. See Heated Rear Seats
0 55.
Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are in the center and on the side of the instrument panel.
1. Slider Knob
2. Thumbwheel
Move the slider knobs (1) to change the direction of the airflow.
Use the thumbwheels (2) near the air vents to open or close off the airflow.
Operation Tips
. Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle.
. Clear snow off the hood to improve visibility and help decrease moisture drawn into the vehicle.
. When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, press the fan up button to the maximum fan level before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of the window.
. Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.
. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter reduces the dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 379. To find out what type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 390.
2. Disconnect the glove box door damper string from the glove box door assembly. A pen or pencil may be inserted through the end of the damper string to prevent the string from slipping inside the door assembly.
Climate Controls 181
3. Remove the six screws and remove the access plate.
4. Release the two tabs holding the service door. Open the service door and remove the old filter.
5. Install the new air filter.
6. Close the service door and secure the tabs.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the glove box.
See your dealer if additional assistance is needed.
1. Open the glove box completely.
182 Climate Controls
Service
All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation.
During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.
The air conditioning system requires periodic maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
Driving and Operating
Driving Information Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 193 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 193 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 195 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 201 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ignition Positions (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Active Fuel Management . . . . . 211 Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 213 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Drive Systems Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Brakes Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 225
Driving and Operating 183
Ride Control Systems Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 228 Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . 229 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Automatic Level Control . . . . . . 229
Cruise Control Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . 232
Driver Assistance Systems Driver Assistance Systems . . . 240 Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 242 Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . 250 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . 251
Fuel Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Recommended Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
184 Driving and Operating
Recommended Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 255 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Trailer Towing General Towing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 278
Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Driving Information
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible:
. Set the climate controls to the desired temperature after the engine is started, or turn them off when not required.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
. Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.
. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
. Combine several trips into a single trip.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.
. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area.
To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving.
. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.
. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.
. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.
. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.
. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.
. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.
{ Warning
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Refer to the infotainment manual for more information on using that system and the navigation system, if equipped, including pairing and using a cell phone.
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means "always expect the unexpected." The first step in driving defensively is to wear the seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 62.
. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready.
Driving and Operating 185
. Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy.
{ Warning
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
186 Driving and Operating
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:
. Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
. Keep pace with traffic.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Steering
Caution
To avoid damage to the steering system, do not drive over curbs, parking barriers, or similar objects at speeds greater than 3 km/h (1 mph). Use care when driving over other objects such as lane dividers and speed bumps. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Electric Power Steering
This vehicle has electric power steering. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required.
If power steering assist is lost due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered, but may require increased effort.
See your dealer if there is a problem.
If the steering assist is used for an extended period of time while the vehicle is not moving, power assist may be reduced.
If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel, and is held in that position for an extended period of time, power steering assist may be reduced.
Normal use of the power steering assist should return when the system cools down.
See your dealer if there is a problem.
Curve Tips
. Take curves at a reasonable speed.
. Reduce speed before entering a curve.
. Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
. There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.
. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.
Off-Road Recovery
Driving and Operating 187
1. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips:
Skidding
There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:
. Braking Skid -- wheels are not rolling.
. Steering or Cornering Skid -- too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
. Acceleration Skid -- too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
188 Driving and Operating
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:
. Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface -- and slow down when you have any doubt.
. Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be used for off-road driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles not equipped with All Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR) tires must not be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface. For contact information about the original equipment tires, see the warranty manual.
One of the best ways for successful off-road driving is to control the speed.
{ Warning
When driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.
Before Driving Off-Road
. Have all necessary maintenance and service work completed.
. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, and check inflation pressure in all tires, including the spare, if equipped.
. Read all the information about four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
. Remove any underbody air deflector, if equipped. Re-attach the air deflector after off-road driving.
. Know the local laws that apply to off-road driving.
To gain more ground clearance if needed, it may be necessary to remove the front fascia lower air dam, if equipped. However, driving without the air dam reduces fuel economy.
Caution
Operating the vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper airflow to the engine. Reattach the front fascia air dam after off-road driving.
Loading the Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
{ Warning
. Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward of the rear axle.
. Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
For more information about loading the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 196 and Tires 0 326.
Driving and Operating 189
Environmental Concerns
. Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been set aside for public off-road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
. Do not damage shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
. Do not park over things that burn. See Parking over Things That Burn 0 211.
Driving on Hills
Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do.
{ Warning
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. Driving up hills can cause the vehicle to stall. Driving down hills can cause loss of control. Driving across hills can
(Continued)
190 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
{ Warning
cause a rollover. You could be injured or killed. Do not drive on steep hills.
Before driving on a hill, assess the steepness, traction, and obstructions. If the terrain ahead cannot be seen, get out of the vehicle and walk the hill before driving further.
When driving on hills:
. Use a low gear and keep a firm grip on the steering wheel.
. Maintain a slow speed.
. When possible, drive straight up or down the hill.
. Slow down when approaching the top of the hill.
. Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible.
Driving to the top of a hill at high speed can cause a crash. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
. Never go downhill forward or backward with either the transmission or transfer case in N (Neutral). The brakes could overheat and you could lose control.
{ Warning
If the vehicle has the two-speed automatic or electronic transfer case, shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). This is because the N (Neutral) position
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
on the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone else could be injured. If leaving the vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission to P (Park). Shift the transfer case to any position but N (Neutral).
. When driving down a hill, keep the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear because the engine will work with the brakes to slow the vehicle and help keep the vehicle under control.
{ Warning
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and you or others could be injured or killed. Apply the brakes lightly when
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
1. Apply the brakes to stop the vehicle, and then apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into P (Park) and then restart the engine.
. If driving uphill when the vehicle stalls, shift to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and back straight down.
. Never try to turn the vehicle around. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over.
. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill.
. Never back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake. The vehicle can roll backward quickly and you could lose control.
. If driving downhill when the vehicle stalls, shift to a lower gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down the hill.
3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted after stalling, set the parking brake, shift into P (Park), and turn the vehicle off.
3.1. Leave the vehicle and seek help.
3.2. Stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.
. Avoid turns that take the vehicle across the incline of the hill. A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
Driving and Operating 191
downhill wheels, which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
. Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it -- a rock, a rut, etc. -- and roll over.
. Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline more severe. If a rock is driven across with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more.
. If an incline must be driven across, and the vehicle starts to slide, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
192 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Getting out of the vehicle on the downhill side when stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
Use a low gear when driving in mud -- the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. Keep the vehicle moving to avoid getting stuck.
Traction changes when driving on sand. On loose sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tires tend to sink into the sand. This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Traction is reduced on hard packed snow and ice and it is easy to lose control. Reduce vehicle speed when driving on hard packed snow and ice.
{ Warning
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. Ice conditions vary greatly and the vehicle could fall through the ice; you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
{ Warning
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Traction could be lost, and the vehicle could roll over. Do not drive through rushing water.
Caution
Do not drive through standing water if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts.
If the standing water is not too deep, drive through it slowly. At faster speeds, water can get into the engine and cause it to stall. Stalling can occur if the exhaust pipe is under water. Do not turn off the ignition when driving through water. If the exhaust pipe is under water, the engine will not start. When going through water, the brakes get wet and it may take longer to stop. See "Driving on Wet Roads" later in this section.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody or chassis, or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, driveline, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
More frequent maintenance service is required. See the Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.
{ Warning
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is
Driving and Operating 193
wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:
. Allow extra following distance.
. Pass with caution.
. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires 0 326.
. Turn off cruise control.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:
194 Driving and Operating
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.
. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.
{ Warning
Using the brakes to slow the vehicle on a long downhill slope can cause brake overheating, can reduce brake performance, and could result in a loss of braking. Shift the transmission to a lower gear to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Warning (Continued)
loss of steering assist. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear.
. Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line.
. Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, crash).
. Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
{ Warning
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. This can cause overheating of the brakes and
(Continued)
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when
freezing rain begins to fall. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated.
For Slippery Road Driving:
. Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick.
. Turn on Traction Control. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) 0 224.
. Allow greater following distance and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.
. Turn off cruise control.
Blizzard Conditions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and signal for help. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 400. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
{ Warning
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in snow:
. Clear snow from the base of the vehicle, especially any blocking the exhaust pipe.
. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the vehicle side that is away from the wind, to bring in fresh air.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the climate control system to circulate the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See "Climate Control Systems."
For more information about CO, see Engine Exhaust 0 212.
To save fuel, run the engine for short periods to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps.
Driving and Operating 195
If it takes time for help to arrive, when running the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible, to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
{ Warning
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
(Continued)
196 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Recovery Hooks
{ Warning
Never pull on recovery hooks from the side. The hooks could break and you and others could be injured. When using recovery hooks, always pull the vehicle from the front.
Caution
Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
There are recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle. Use them if the vehicle is stuck off-road and needs to be pulled some place to continue driving.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a low forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle 0 363.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{ Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping distance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment
Driving and Operating 197
tires (3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires 0 326 and Tire Pressure 0 333.
There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See "Certification/Tire Label" later in this section.
"Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
198 Driving and Operating
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle." See Trailer Towing 0 264 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs)
3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
Example 2 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg (750 lbs) 3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs)
Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to the vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label
A vehicle specific Certification/ Tire label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The label may shows the size of the vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Driving and Operating 199
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also may show the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on the front and rear axles, weigh the vehicle at a weigh station. Your dealer can help with this. Be sure to spread your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
The Certification/Tire label may also include information about the Front Axle Reserve Capacity.
{ Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the
(Continued)
200 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping distance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle.
Caution
Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
The label will help decide how much cargo and installed equipment the truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change the weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help load the vehicle the right way.
{ Warning
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
. Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.
There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See "Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving" under Off-Road Driving 0 188.
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Caution
The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
. Keep the vehicle speed at 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for the first 805 km (500 mi).
. Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 805 km (500 mi). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for the first 322 km (200 mi) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Trailer Towing 0 264 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If equipped, the position of the throttle and brake pedals can be changed.
The pedals can only be adjusted when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Driving and Operating 201
The switch used to adjust the pedals is to the left of the steering wheel. Press the switch to the left to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the switch to the right to move the pedals away. Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you. The vehicle may have a memory function, which lets pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seats 0 51.
202 Driving and Operating Ignition Positions (Keyless Access)
Vehicles equipped with Keyless Access have pushbutton starting. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter must be in the vehicle for the system to operate. If the pushbutton start is not working, the vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the Keyless Access system. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key Access) 0 13 or
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation (Keyless Access) 0 16.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be on or in service mode, and the brake pedal must be applied.
Stopping the Engine/LOCK/ OFF (No Indicator Lights) : When the vehicle is stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the ignition will turn off, and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 209.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the ignition will return to ACC/ ACCESSORY and display the message SHIFT TO PARK in the Driver Information Center (DIC). When the vehicle is shifted into P (Park), the ignition system will turn off.
Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags.
The vehicle may have an electric steering column lock. The lock is activated when the ignition is turned off and either front door is opened. A sound may be heard as the lock actuates or releases. The steering column lock may not release with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, the vehicle may not start. Move the steering wheel from left to right while attempting to start the vehicle. If this does not work, the vehicle needs service.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift to P (Park), and turn the ignition off. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition off.
4. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 0 225.
{ Warning
Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, press and hold ENGINE START/ STOP for longer than two seconds, or press twice in five seconds.
ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber Indicator Light) : This mode allows some electrical accessories to be used when the engine is off.
With the ignition off, pressing the button one time without the brake pedal applied will place the ignition system in ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition will switch from ACC/ ACCESSORY to off after five minutes to prevent battery rundown.
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator Light) : This mode is for driving and starting. With the ignition off, and the brake pedal applied, pressing the button once will turn the ignition on. Once engine cranking begins, release the button. Engine cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the Engine 0 206.
Driving and Operating 203
Service Mode
This power mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. With the vehicle off, and the brake pedal not applied, pressing and holding the button for more than five seconds will place the vehicle in Service Mode. The instruments and audio systems will operate as they do when the ignition is on, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The engine will not start in Service Mode. Press the button again to turn the ignition off.
204 Driving and Operating
Ignition Positions (Key Access)
0 (Stopping the Engine/LOCK/ OFF) : This position turns off the vehicle. It also locks the ignition, the transmission, and the steering column, if equipped with a locking steering column.
0. Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF
1. ACC/ACCESSORY
2. ON/RUN
3. START
The ignition switch has four positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN and the brake pedal must be applied.
To turn off the vehicle:
1. Make sure that the vehicle is stopped.
2. Shift to P (Park).
3. Continue to hold the brake pedal, then set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 0 225.
4. Push the key all the way in the steering column (1), then turn the key to LOCK/OFF (2).
5. Remove the key.
6. Release the brake pedal.
See your dealer if the key can be removed in any other position.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 209.
A warning chime will sound when the driver door is opened and the key is in the ignition.
If equipped with a locking steering column, the steering can bind with the front wheels turned off center, which may prevent key rotation out of LOCK/OFF. If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ ACCESSORY. If this does not work, then the vehicle needs service.
{ Warning
Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, turn off the vehicle only in an emergency.
In an emergency, if the vehicle cannot be pulled over and must be turned off while driving:
1. Push the key all the way in toward the steering column, then turn the key to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
2. Brake using firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
3. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. Continue braking and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
4. Come to a complete stop.
5. Shift to P (Park).
6. Push the key all the way in toward the steering column (1), then turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF (2).
7. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 0 225.
8. Remove the key.
9. Release the brake pedal.
Caution
Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in -- or pushed all the way in toward the steering column when turning off the vehicle -- and turn it only with your hand.
1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This position allows features such as the infotainment system to operate while the vehicle is off. It also unlocks the steering column, if equipped with a locking steering column. Use this position if the
Driving and Operating 205
vehicle must be pushed or towed. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 0 209.
From ON/RUN, push the key all the way in toward the steering column, then turn the key to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
If the key is left in ACC/ ACCESSORY with the engine off, the battery could drain and the vehicle may not start.
A warning chime will sound when the driver door is opened and the key is in the ignition.
2 (ON/RUN) : This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument cluster warning and indicator lights. This position can also be used for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. The switch stays in this position when the engine is running. The transmission is also unlocked in this position.
206 Driving and Operating
If the key is left in ON/RUN with the engine off, the battery could drain and the vehicle may not start. The transmission can be shifted in this position.
3 (START) : This is the position that starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Caution
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped.
Caution
If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 280.
Starting Procedure (Key Access)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.
When the low fuel warning lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW message is displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), hold the ignition switch in the START position to continue engine cranking.
Caution
Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the ignition to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below -18 °C or 0 °F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there while holding the key in START for up to 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure (Keyless Access)
1. With the Keyless Access system, the RKE transmitter must be in the vehicle. Press ENGINE START/STOP with the brake pedal applied. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the button.
The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
If the RKE transmitter is not in the vehicle, if there is interference, or if the RKE
battery is low, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message.
Caution
Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by trying to start the engine immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below -18 °C or 0 °F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you press ENGINE START/ STOP, for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to
Driving and Operating 207
cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the button, and the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Engine Heater
{ Warning
Do not plug in the engine block heater while the vehicle is parked in a garage or under a carport. Property damage or personal injury may result. Always park the vehicle in a clear open area away from buildings or structures.
If equipped, the engine heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold weather conditions
208 Driving and Operating
at or below -18 °C (0 °F). Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. There may be an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord, which will prevent engine heater operation at temperatures above -18 °C (0 °F).
To Use the Engine Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is by the left front fender, next to the engine compartment fuse block.
Check the heater cord for damage. If it is damaged, do not use it. See your dealer for a replacement. Inspect the cord for damage yearly.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ Warning
Improper use of the heater cord or an extension cord can damage the cord and may result in overheating and fire.
. Plug the cord into a three-prong electrical utility receptacle that is protected by a ground fault detection function. An ungrounded outlet could cause an electric shock.
. Use a weatherproof, heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated extension cord if needed. Failure to use the recommended extension cord in good operating condition, or using a damaged heater or extension cord, could make
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
it overheat and cause a fire, property damage, electric shock, and injury.
. Do not operate the vehicle with the heater cord permanently attached to the vehicle. Possible heater cord and thermostat damage could occur.
. While in use, do not let the heater cord touch vehicle parts or sharp edges. Never close the hood on the heater cord.
. Before starting the vehicle, unplug the cord, reattach the cover to the plug, and securely fasten the cord. Keep the cord away from any moving parts.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
When the ignition is turned from on to off, the following features (if equipped) will continue to function for up to 10 minutes, or until the driver door is opened. These features will also work when the ignition is in RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY:
. Infotainment System
. Power Windows (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)
. Sunroof (during RAP this functionality will be lost when any door is opened)
. Auxiliary Power Outlet
. Audio System
. OnStar System
Shifting Into Park
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If the vehicle has a four-wheel-drive transfer case with an N (Neutral) position, and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear. If towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 259.
Driving and Operating 209
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. See Parking Brake 0 225.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N (Neutral).
4. Push the ignition key in, towards the steering column and then turn the ignition off.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
(Continued)
210 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in N (Neutral).
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission. You will then be able to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release system is designed to prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is on and the brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting - North America 0 360.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the shift lever all the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the vehicle serviced soon.
Parking over Things That Burn
{ Warning
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.
Active Fuel Management
Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel Management. This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending on the driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy. When greater power demands are required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel Management indicator, see Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144 for more information on using this display.
Driving and Operating 211
If the vehicle is left parked and running with the RKE transmitter inside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to an hour.
The vehicle could turn off sooner if it is parked on a hill, due to lack of available fuel.
The timer will reset if the vehicle is taken out of P (Park) while it is running.
Extended Parking
It is best not to park with the vehicle running. If the vehicle is left running, be sure it will not move and there is adequate ventilation.
See Shifting Into Park 0 209 and Engine Exhaust 0 212.
If the vehicle is left parked and running with the RKE transmitter outside the vehicle, it will continue to run for up to half an hour.
212 Driving and Operating
Engine Exhaust
{ Warning
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO), which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
. The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
. The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.
. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.
. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
. Drive it only with the windows completely down.
. Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park 0 209 and Engine Exhaust 0 212.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 259.
Automatic Transmission
This vehicle has an electronic shift lever position indicator within the instrument cluster. This display comes on when the ignition is on or in service mode. There are several different positions for the shift lever.
See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode 0 216. P : This position locks the drive wheels. Use P (Park) when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you might notice an increase in the effort to
shift out of P (Park). See "Torque Lock" under Shifting Into Park 0 209.
{ Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park 0 209 and Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 259.
Driving and Operating 213
{ Warning
If you have four-wheel drive, the vehicle will be free to roll -- even if the shift lever is in P (Park) -- if the transfer case is in N (Neutral). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive Low -- not in N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park 0 209.
R : Use this gear to back up.
Caution
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
214 Driving and Operating
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 195.
N : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
{ Warning
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.
Caution
Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Caution
A transmission hot message may display if the automatic transmission fluid is too hot. Driving under this condition can damage the vehicle. Stop and idle the engine to cool the automatic transmission fluid. This message clears when the transmission fluid has cooled sufficiently.
D : This position is for normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down.
Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Mode when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or driving off-road. Shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See "Skidding" under Loss of Control 0 187.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear.
In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating normally.
The transmission uses adaptive shift controls. The adaptive shift control process continually compares key shift parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmission's computer. The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load or when the temperature changes. During this adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel different as the transmission determines the best settings.
When temperatures are very cold, the transmission's gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
L : This position allows selection of a range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions. If equipped, see "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode 0 216.
Caution
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Normal Mode Grade Braking
This mode is enabled when the vehicle is started, but is not enabled in Range Selection Mode. It assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 215
The first time the system engages for each ignition cycle, a DIC message will be displayed.
To disable or enable Normal Mode Grade Braking within the current ignition cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul button for five seconds. When the button is released, the requested mode change is made. A DIC message displays.
For other forms of grade braking, see Tow/Haul Mode 0 218 and Cruise Control 0 230.
Kickdown Mode
The accelerator pedal provides an additional downshift after pressing through the kickdown feature.
It requires extra pedal pressure near the end of its travel to engage.
216 Driving and Operating Manual Mode Range Selection Mode
If equipped, Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's transmission and vehicle speed while driving downhill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears. To use this feature: 1. Move the shift lever to
L (Manual Mode). 2. Press the plus/minus buttons
on the shift lever to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions. Hold the plus/minus buttons on the shift lever to select the highest or lowest range available for the current vehicle speed.
When the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), a number displays next to the L, indicating the current transmission range.
This number is the highest gear that the transmission will command while operating in L (Manual Mode). All gears below that number are available. As driving conditions change, the transmission can automatically shift to lower gears. For example, when 5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted by the transmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the plus/minus button on the shift lever is used to change to the range.
When the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), a downshift may occur. The gear that the transmission is operating in when the shift lever is moved from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode) determines if a downshift occurs. See the following chart.
6 Speed Transmission
Gear before shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
Driving and Operating 217
6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st L4 L4 L3 L2 L2 L1
Low Traction Mode
Low Traction Mode assists in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery, such as with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a stop, select L2 using Range Selection Mode. This will limit torque to the wheels and help to prevent the tires from spinning.
10 Speed Transmission
Gear before shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)
Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode) - Tow/Haul not engaged
Range after shifting from D (Drive) to L (Manual Mode) - Tow/Haul engaged
10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st L7 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1
218 Driving and Operating
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and the Tow/Haul Mode can be used.
Tow/Haul Mode
Caution
Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If the vehicle is stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling. This provides increased performance, vehicle control, and enhanced transmission and engine cooling when driving down steep hills or mountain grades, towing, or hauling heavy loads.
The selector button is on the end of the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off by pressing the button. When the Tow/Haul Mode is enabled, a light on the instrument cluster will come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 139 and Hill and Mountain Roads 0 193.
Also see "Tow/Haul Mode" under Towing Equipment 0 270.
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is only enabled while the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and the vehicle is not in the Range Selection Mode. See "Tow/Haul Mode" listed previously and Manual Mode 0 216. Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle.
To disable or enable Tow/Haul Grade Braking within the current ignition cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul button for five seconds. When the button is released, the requested mode change is made. A DIC message is displayed.
See Towing Equipment 0 270.
For other forms of grade braking, see Automatic Transmission 0 213 and Cruise Control 0 230.
Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive
If equipped, four-wheel drive engages the front axle for extra traction.
Caution
Do not drive on clean, dry
pavement in 4 m and 4 n (if
equipped) for an extended period of time. These conditions may cause premature wear on the vehicle's powertrain.
Driving on clean, dry pavement in 4
m or 4 n may:
. Cause a vibration to be felt in the steering system.
. Cause tires to wear faster. . Make the transfer case harder to
shift, and cause it to run noisier.
Driving and Operating 219
{ Warning
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See Parking Brake 0 225.
Caution
Extended high-speed operation in
4 n may damage or shorten the
life of the drivetrain.
Engagement noise and bump when
shifting between 4 n and 4 m or from
N (Neutral), with the engine running, is normal.
220 Driving and Operating Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
Control and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226. Two Speed Automatic Transfer Case
If equipped, use the transfer case knob next to the steering wheel to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. All of the lights will blink on then off momentarily when the ignition turned on. The light that remains on will indicate the state of the transfer case.
If the indicator mark on the switch does not match up with the light then that likely means the switch was moved when the ignition was off.
The indicator mark on the switch must line up with the indicator light before a shift can be commanded. To command a shift rotate the transfer case switch to the new desired position. The light will blink meaning that the shift is in progress. When the shift is completed the new position will be illuminated. If the transfer case cannot complete a shift command, it will go back to its last chosen setting.
The settings are:
N (Neutral) : Use only when the vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 364 or Towing the Vehicle 0 363.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use
for driving on most streets and highways. The front axle is not engaged. This setting provides the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) : Use when road surface traction conditions are variable. When driving in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, and the vehicle's power is sent to the front and rear wheels automatically based on driving conditions. This setting provides slightly lower fuel economy
than 2 m.
Do not use AUTO mode, if equipped, to park on a steep grade with poor traction such as ice, snow, mud, or gravel. In AUTO mode only the rear wheels will hold the vehicle from sliding when parked. If parking on a steep grade,
use 4 m to keep all four wheels
engaged.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Use
this position when extra traction is needed, such as when driving on snowy or icy roads, when off-roading, or when plowing snow.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This
setting engages the front axle and
delivers extra torque. Choose 4 n
when driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, or deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction
Control and StabiliTrak/ESC off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO
Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTO
position at any speed, except from 4
n. The indicator light will flash while
shifting and will remain on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into 2 m
Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed, except when shifting from 4 n. The
indicator light will flash while shifting and will remain on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into 4 n
When 4 n is engaged, keep vehicle
speed below 72 km/h (45 mph).
To shift:
1. The ignition must be on and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the transmission in N (Neutral). It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the 4 n indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
Caution
Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
Driving and Operating 221
to 4 m to display the indicator. With
the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting Out of 4 n
To shift:
1. The vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition on. It is best for the vehicle to be moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
If the transmission is in gear and/or moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the 4 n indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift. After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob
Caution
Shifting the transmission into gear before the requested mode indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
222 Driving and Operating
If the transmission is in gear and/or moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light
will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift. With the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transmission in N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
To shift into N (Neutral):
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Set the parking brake and press and hold the brake pedal. See Parking Brake 0 225.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition on.
4. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.
6. Turn the transfer case knob clockwise to N (Neutral) until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) light starts blinking. This will take at least
10 seconds. Then slowly
release the knob to the 4 n
position. The N (Neutral) light will come on when the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
7. With the engine running, verify that the transfer case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse), then shift the transmission to D (Drive). There should be no movement of the vehicle while shifting the transmission.
8. Turn the engine off, and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). See Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 364.
10. Turn the ignition off.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
To shift out of N (Neutral):
1. Set the parking brake and apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition on with the engine off.
3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired setting.
After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired gear.
Single Speed Automatic Transfer Case
Use the transfer case knob, next to the steering wheel, to shift into and out of four-wheel drive for extra traction. All of the lights will blink on then off momentarily when the ignition is turned on. The light that remains on will indicate the state of the transfer case.
If the indicator mark on the switch does not match up with the light then that likely means the switch was moved when the ignition was off.
The indicator mark on the switch must line up with the indicator light before a shift can be commanded. To command a shift rotate the transfer case switch to the new desired position. The light will blink meaning that the shift is in progress. When the shift is completed the new position will be illuminated. If the transfer case can not complete a shift command, it will go back to its last chosen setting.
The settings are:
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Use
for driving on most streets and highways. The front axle is not engaged. This setting provides the best fuel economy.
Driving and Operating 223
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) : Use when road surface traction conditions are variable. When driving in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, and the vehicle's power is sent to the front and rear wheels automatically based on driving conditions. This setting provides slightly lower fuel economy
than 2 m.
Do not use AUTO mode to park on a steep grade with poor traction such as ice, snow, mud, or gravel. In AUTO mode only rear wheels will hold the vehicle from sliding when parked. If parking on a steep grade,
use 4 m to keep all four wheels
engaged.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Use
this position when extra traction is needed, such as when driving on snowy or icy roads, when off-roading, or when plowing snow.
224 Driving and Operating
Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO
Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTO
position. This can be done at any speed. The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into 2 m
Turn the knob to the 2 m position.
This can be done at any speed. The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed.
Brakes
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps prevent a braking skid and maintain steering while braking hard.
ABS performs a system check when the vehicle is first driven. A momentary motor or clicking noise may be heard while this test is going on, and the brake pedal may move slightly. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 0 138.
ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot on the brake pedal and does not always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle ahead, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly. Hearing or feeling ABS operate is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows steering and braking at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help even more than braking.
Parking Brake
Set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 138.
Caution
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive, a DIC message will appear and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
Brake Assist
Brake Assist detects rapid brake pedal applications due to emergency braking situations and provides additional braking to activate the Antilock Brake System
Driving and Operating 225
(ABS) if the brake pedal is not pushed hard enough to activate ABS normally. Minor noise, brake pedal pulsation, and/or pedal movement during this time may occur. Continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. Brake Assist disengages when the brake pedal is released.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
{ Warning
Do not rely on the HSA feature. HSA does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
When the vehicle is stopped on a grade, Hill Start Assist (HSA) temporarily prevents the vehicle from rolling in an unintended direction during the transition from
226 Driving and Operating
brake pedal release to accelerator pedal apply. The brakes release when the accelerator pedal is applied or automatically release after a few seconds. The brakes may also release under other conditions. Do not rely on HSA to hold the vehicle.
HSA is available when the vehicle is facing uphill in a forward gear, or when facing downhill in R (Reverse). The vehicle must come to a complete stop on a grade for HSA to activate.
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control
System Operation
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an electronic stability control system. These systems help limit wheel spin and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions.
TCS activates if it senses that any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to the spinning wheels and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
StabiliTrak activates when the vehicle senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle wheel brakes to assist the driver in keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is also on automatically when the vehicle is started. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 278.
If cruise control is being used and traction control or StabiliTrak begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow.
Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.
It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 195 and "Turning the Systems Off and On" later in this section.
When the transfer case is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, the stability
system is automatically disabled, g
comes on, and the appropriate message will appear on the DIC. Both traction control and StabiliTrak are automatically disabled in this condition.
The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light will: . Flash when TCS is limiting
wheel spin. . Flash when StabiliTrak is
activated. . Turn on and stay on when either
system is not working. If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), and
d comes on and stays on to
indicate that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in maintaining control. The vehicle is safe to drive, but driving should be adjusted accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 seconds.
3. Start the engine.
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
and stays on, the vehicle may need more time to diagnose the problem. If the condition persists, see your dealer.
Turning the Systems Off and On
Driving and Operating 227
The button for TCS and StabiliTrak is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Caution
Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged.
To turn off only TCS, press and
release g. The traction off light i
displays in the instrument cluster. The appropriate message will display in the DIC. To turn TCS on
again, press and release g. The traction off light i displayed in the
instrument cluster will turn off.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when g
is pressed, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning.
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
press and hold g until the traction off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF light g come on and stay on in the
228 Driving and Operating
instrument cluster, then release. The appropriate message will display in the DIC.
To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on
again, press and release g. The traction off light i and the StabiliTrak OFF light g in the
instrument cluster turn off.
StabiliTrak will automatically turn on if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h (35 mph). Traction control will remain off.
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 278 or Hill Start Assist (HSA) 0 225.
Adding accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications 0 283.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
If equipped, Hill Descent Control (HDC) sets and maintains vehicle speed while driving down steep grades in a forward or reverse gear. The HDC switch is on the center stack, below the climate controls.
Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.
Vehicle speed must be below 50 km/h (31 mph).
When enabled, the HDC light displays on the instrument cluster. A blinking HDC light indicates the system is actively applying the brakes to maintain vehicle speed. HDC can maintain vehicle speeds between 1 and 30 km/h (1 and 19 mph) on grades greater than or equal to 10%.
If HDC is to be used for more than three minutes or on grades steeper than 25%, the transfer case should be put into Four-Wheel Drive Low (4
n) to reduce the possibility of brake
overheating.
Noise from the hydraulic brake control module is normal when HDC is active.
When HDC is activated, the initial HDC speed is set to the current driving speed. It can be increased or decreased by pressing +RES or SET- on the steering wheel, or by applying the accelerator or brake pedal. This adjusted speed becomes the new set speed.
HDC will remain enabled between 30 and 60 km/h (19 and 37 mph); however, vehicle speed cannot be set or maintained in this range. HDC will automatically disable if the vehicle speed is above 80 km/h (50 mph) or above 60 km/h (37 mph) for at least 30 seconds.
5 must be pressed again to
re-enable HDC. HDC may disable after an extended period of use.
If this happens, HDC will require time to cool down. The length of time HDC remains active depends on road conditions, grade, set speed, vehicle loading, and outside temperature.
When enabled, if the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (19 mph) and below 60 km/h (37 mph), a DIC message will display.
Magnetic Ride Control
If equipped, this vehicle may have a semi-active damping system called Magnetic Ride Control. With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is provided under a variety of passenger and loading conditions.
Locking Rear Axle
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle.
Automatic Level Control
The Automatic Level Control (ALC) rear suspension is available on light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the Magnetic Ride Control suspension, if equipped. ALC may also be available as a stand alone feature.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is activated when the ignition key is turned on and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter. The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned off. You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted.
Driving and Operating 229
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
230 Driving and Operating
Cruise Control
{ Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
and Grade Braking systems. See "Grade Braking" underTow/Haul Mode 0 218.
This vehicle has StabiliTrak and when the system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226. If a collision alert occurs when cruise control is activated, cruise control is disengaged. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 245. When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again, it can be turned back on.
With cruise control a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control disengages.
For an explanation of how cruise control interacts with the Range Selection Mode, Tow/Haul Mode,
5 : Press to turn the system on or
off. A white indicator comes on in the instrument cluster when the cruise is turned on.
SET- : Press briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control. If cruise control is already active, use to decrease vehicle speed.
+RES : If there is a set speed in memory, press to resume that speed or press and hold to accelerate. If cruise control is already active, use to increase vehicle speed.
* : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If 5 is on when not in use, SET- or
+RES could get pressed and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise 5 button off when cruise is
not being used.
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise
system on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET-. The desired set speed briefly appears in the instrument cluster.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator.
The cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster turns green after cruise control has been set to the desired speed. See Instrument Cluster 0 126.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes
or * is applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, briefly press +RES. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated:
. Press and hold +RES until the vehicle accelerates to the desired speed, then release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press +RES. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 126. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated:
. Press and hold SET until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.
Driving and Operating 231
. To slow down in small increments, briefly press SET. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 126. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal or shortly following the release to override cruise control, briefly pressing SET will result in cruise control set to the current vehicle speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the vehicle speed, the load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, pressing the accelerator pedal
232 Driving and Operating
may be necessary to maintain vehicle speed. When going downhill, Cruise Grade Braking helps maintain the driver selected speed.
Cruise Grade Braking is enabled when the vehicle is started and cruise control is active. It is not enabled in Range Selection Mode. It assists in maintaining driver selected speed when driving on downhill grades by using the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle.
To disable and enable Cruise Grade Braking for the current ignition key cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul button for five seconds. A DIC message displays.
For other forms of Grade Braking, see Automatic Transmission 0 213 and Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to end cruise control:
. Step lightly on the brake pedal.
. Press *.
. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
. To turn off cruise control,
press 5.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if 5 is pressed
or if the ignition is turned off.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), it allows for selecting the cruise control set speed and following gap. Read this entire section before using this system. ACC uses a camera and radar sensors to detect other vehicles. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405. The following gap is the following time (or distance) between your vehicle and a vehicle detected directly ahead in your path, moving in the same direction. If no vehicle is detected in your path, ACC works like regular cruise control.
If a vehicle is detected in your path, ACC can speed up the vehicle or apply limited, moderate braking to maintain the selected following gap. To disengage ACC, apply the brake. If the Traction Control System (TCS) or electronic stability control system activates while ACC is engaged, ACC may automatically disengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226. When road conditions allow ACC to be safely used, the ACC can be turned back on.
ACC will not engage if the TCS or electronic stability control system is disabled.
{ Warning
ACC has limited braking ability and may not have time to slow the vehicle down enough to avoid a collision with another vehicle you are following. This can occur when vehicles suddenly slow or stop ahead, or enter your lane.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Also see "Alerting the Driver" in this section. Complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
{ Warning
ACC will not detect or brake for children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects.
Do not use ACC when: . On winding and hilly roads or when the sensors are blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Keep the entire front of the vehicle clean. (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Visibility is low, such as in fog, rain, or snow conditions. ACC performance is limited under these conditions.
. On slippery roads where fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip.
Driving and Operating 233
5 : Press to turn the system on or
off. The indicator turns white on the instrument cluster when ACC is turned on.
+RES : Press briefly to resume the previous set speed or hold to accelerate. If ACC is already engaged, use to increase vehicle speed.
SET : Press briefly to set the speed and activate ACC. If cruise control is already engaged, use to decrease vehicle speed.
* : Press to disengage ACC
without erasing the selected set speed.
3 : Press to select a following gap
time (or distance) setting for ACC of Far, Medium, or Near.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster 0 126. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
234 Driving and Operating
Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control If equipped, to switch between ACC and regular cruise control, press
and hold *. A Driver Information
Center (DIC) message displays. See Vehicle Messages 0 151.
ACC Indicator Regular Cruise Control Indicator
When ACC is engaged, a green
\ indicator will be lit on the
instrument cluster and the following gap will be displayed. When the regular cruise control is engaged, a
green J indicator will be lit on the
instrument cluster; the following gap will not display. When the vehicle is turned on, the cruise control mode will be set to the last mode used before the vehicle was turned off.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
If J is on when not in use, it could
get pressed and go into ACC when
not desired. Keep J off when
cruise is not being used.
Select the set speed desired for cruise. This is the vehicle speed when no vehicle is detected in its path.
ACC will not set or resume at a speed less than 25 km/h (16 mph).
To set ACC:
1. Press 5.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET .
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator.
After ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead is detected closer than the selected following gap.
ACC can also be set while the vehicle is stopped if ACC is on and the brake pedal is applied.
The ACC indicator displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) in the instrument cluster and Head-Up display (HUD), if equipped. When ACC is active, the indicator turns green.
Be mindful of speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when selecting the set speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the ACC is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, ACC is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
To begin using ACC again, press +RES on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed.
Increasing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed
Do one of the following:
. Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed. Press SET . Release the control and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed, ACC will not brake because it is overridden. The ACC indicator will turn blue on the instrument panel and heads up display, if equipped.
. Press and hold +RES until the desired set speed appears on the display, then release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press +RES. For each press, the vehicle goes to the next 1 km/h (1 mph) faster mark on the speedometer.
. To increase speed in larger increments, press and briefly hold +RES. For each press, the
vehicle speed goes to next 5 km/h (5 mph) faster mark on the speedometer.
When it is determined that there is no vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed.
The set speed can also be increased while the vehicle is stopped.
. If stopped with the brake applied, press RES+ until the desired set speed is displayed.
. Pressing RES+ when there is no longer a vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is pulling away and the brake is not applied will cause the ACC to resume.
Reducing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed
Do one of the following:
. Use the brake to get to the desired lower speed. Release the brake and press SET . The vehicle will now cruise at the lower speed.
Driving and Operating 235
. Press and hold SET until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.
. To decrease the vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press SET-. For each press, the vehicle speed goes to the next 1 km/h (1 mph) slower mark on the speedometer.
. To decrease speed in larger increments, press and briefly hold SET-. For each press, the vehicle speed goes to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) slower mark on the speedometer.
The set speed can also be decreased while the vehicle is stopped.
. If stopped with the brake applied, press or hold SET- until the desired set speed is displayed.
Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
When a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead within the selected following gap, ACC will adjust the
236 Driving and Operating
vehicle's speed and attempt to maintain the follow distance gap selected.
Press 3 on the steering wheel to
adjust the following gap. When pressed, the current gap setting displays briefly on the instrument cluster and HUD, if equipped.
Subsequent presses cycle the 3
button through three settings: Far, Medium, or Near. The gap setting will be maintained until it is changed.
Since each gap setting corresponds to a following time (Far, Medium, or Near), the following distance will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the further back your vehicle will follow a vehicle detected ahead. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the following gap. The range of selectable gaps may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
Changing the gap setting automatically changes the alert timing sensitivity (Far, Medium,
or Near) for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 245. Alerting the Driver
Without Head-Up Display
With Head-Up Display If ACC is engaged, driver action may be required when ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because of approaching a vehicle too rapidly. When this condition occurs, six red lights or the collision alert symbol on the HUD, if equipped, will flash on the windshield, and either eight beeps will sound from the front,
or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. See "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152. See Defensive Driving 0 185. Approaching and Following a Vehicle
The vehicle ahead indicator is in the instrument cluster and HUD, if equipped. The vehicle ahead indicator only displays when a vehicle is detected in your vehicle's path moving in the same direction. If this indicator is not displaying, ACC will not respond to or brake to vehicles ahead. ACC automatically slows the vehicle down and adjusts vehicle speed to follow the vehicle in front at the
selected follow gap. The vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but will not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is active, the brake lights will come on. The automatic braking may feel or sound different than if the brakes were applied manually. This is normal.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{ Warning
ACC may not detect and react to stopped or slow-moving vehicles ahead of you. For example, the system may not brake for a vehicle it has never detected moving. This can occur in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly appears due to a vehicle ahead changing lanes. Your vehicle may not stop and could cause a crash. Use caution when using ACC. Your complete
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
ACC Automatically Disengages
ACC may automatically disengage and you will need to manually apply the brakes to slow the vehicle if:
. Your vehicle speed goes below the minimum speed of 16 km/h (10 mph).
. The sensors are blocked.
. The Traction Control System (TCS) or electronic stability control system has activated or been disabled.
. There is a fault in the system.
. The radar falsely reports a blockage when driving in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles or roadside
Driving and Operating 237
objects. A DIC message may display to indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable.
A message will appear on the DIC indicating that cruise is disengaging.
The ACC indicator will turn white when ACC is no longer active.
Notification to Resume ACC
ACC will maintain a following gap behind a detected vehicle and slow your vehicle to a stop behind the detected vehicle.
If the stopped vehicle ahead has driven away and ACC has not resumed, the vehicle ahead indicator will flash as a reminder to check traffic ahead before proceeding. In addition, the left and right sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three times, or three beeps will sound. See "Alert Type" and "Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier" in "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
238 Driving and Operating
When the vehicle ahead drives away, press +RES or the accelerator pedal to resume cruise control.
A DIC warning message may display indicating to shift to P (Park) before exiting the vehicle. See Vehicle Messages 0 151.
{ Warning
If ACC has stopped the vehicle, and if ACC is disengaged, turned off, or canceled, the vehicle will no longer be held at a stop. The vehicle can move. When ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop, always be prepared to manually apply the brakes.
Warning (Continued)
stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle in P (Park) and turn off the ignition before leaving the vehicle.
ACC Override
If using the accelerator pedal while ACC is active, the ACC indicator turns blue on the instrument cluster and in the HUD (if equipped) to indicate that automatic braking will not occur. ACC will resume operation when the accelerator pedal is not being pressed.
{ Warning
{ Warning
Leaving the vehicle without placing it in P (Park) can be dangerous. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held at a
(Continued)
The ACC will not automatically apply the brakes if your foot is resting on the accelerator pedal. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Curves in the Road
{ Warning
On curves, ACC may not detect a vehicle ahead in your lane. You could be startled if the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed, especially when following a vehicle exiting or entering exit ramps. You could lose control of the vehicle or crash. Do not use ACC while driving on an entrance or exit ramp. Always be ready to use the brakes if necessary.
{ Warning
On curves, ACC may respond to a vehicle in another lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra attention in curves and be ready
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) to use the brakes if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves.
ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may reduce the vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC may not detect the vehicle ahead and accelerate to the set speed. When this happens, the vehicle ahead indicator will not appear.
Driving and Operating 239
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brakes.
ACC may occasionally provide an alert and/or braking that is considered unnecessary. It could respond to vehicles in different lanes, signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service.
ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead until it is completely in the lane. The brakes may need to be manually applied.
Do Not Use ACC on Hills and When Towing a Trailer
240 Driving and Operating
Do not use ACC when driving on steep hills or when towing a trailer. ACC will not detect a vehicle in the lane while driving on steep hills. The driver will often need to take over acceleration and braking on steep hills, especially when towing a trailer. If the brakes are applied, the ACC disengages.
Disengaging ACC
There are three ways to disengage ACC:
. Step lightly on the brake pedal.
. Press *.
. Press 5.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if 5 is pressed
or if the ignition is turned off.
Cleaning the Sensing System
The radar sensor on the front of the vehicle can become blocked by snow, ice, dirt, or mud. This area needs to be cleaned for ACC to operate properly.
For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 367.
System operation may also be limited under snow, heavy rain, or road spray conditions.
Driver Assistance Systems
This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems.
{ Warning
Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
Under many conditions, these systems will not:
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
. Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.
. Work at all driving speeds.
. Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.
. Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.
. Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
. Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate.
. Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Driving and Operating 241
Information Center (DIC) messages may display when the systems are unavailable or blocked.
Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To change the volume of the warning chime, see "Comfort and Convenience" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat, the driver seat cushion may provide a vibrating pulse alert instead of beeping. To change this, see "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Cleaning
Depending on vehicle options, keep these areas of the vehicle clean to ensure the best driver assistance feature performance. Driver
242 Driving and Operating
. Front and rear bumpers and the area below the bumpers
. Front grille and headlamps
. Front camera lens in the front grille or near the front emblem
. Front side and rear side panels
. Outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror
. Side camera lens on the bottom of the outside mirrors
. Rear side corner bumpers
. Rear Vision Camera above the license plate
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the RVC displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the infotainment display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press any button on the infotainment system, shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph). The rear vision camera is above the license plate.
Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing
If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), Front Park Assist (FPA), Surround Vision, Front Vision Camera, and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.
1. View Displayed by the Camera
1. View Displayed by the Camera
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper
Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display.
A warning triangle may display to show that RPA has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object.
Surround Vision
If equipped, Surround Vision displays an image of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with the front or rear camera views in the
infotainment display. The front camera is in the grille or near the front emblem, the side cameras are on the bottom of the outside rearview mirrors, and the rear camera is above the license plate.
{ Warning
The Surround Vision cameras have blind spots and will not display all objects near the corners of the vehicle. Folding outside mirrors that are out of position may not display surround view correctly. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.
1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras
2. Area Not Shown
Driving and Operating 243
Front Vision Camera
1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras
2. Area Not Shown
If equipped, a view of the area in front of the vehicle shows in the infotainment display. The view displays after shifting from R (Reverse) to a forward gear, or by touching CAMERA on the infotainment display, and when the vehicle is moving forward slower than 8 km/h (5 mph). If equipped, the front view camera also displays when the Park Assist system detects an object within 30 cm (12 in).
244 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras' field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Park Assist
With RPA, and if equipped with FPA, as the vehicle moves at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors on the bumpers may detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off the ground and below bumper level. These detection distances may be shorter during warmer or humid
weather. Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; and clean sensors after a car wash in freezing temperatures.
{ Warning
The Park Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with Park Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.
The instrument cluster may have a park assist display with bars that show "distance to object" and object location information for RPA, and on some vehicles, FPA. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red.
When an object is first detected in the rear, one beep will be heard from the rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse two times. When an object is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front), a continuous beep will sound from the front or rear depending on
object location, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. Beeps for FPA are higher pitched than for RPA.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
If equipped, when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), RCTA displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right or three Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or right side, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle.
Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.
Turning the Features On or Off
The X button to the left of the
steering wheel is used to turn on or off the Front and Rear Park Assist. The indicator light in the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled.
Front and Rear Park Assist can be set to Off, On, or On with Towbar through vehicle personalization. See "Park Assist" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152. If Park Assist is turned off through vehicle personalization, the Park Assist button will be disabled. To turn the Park Assist on again, select On in vehicle personalization. The On with Towbar setting allows for Park Assist to work properly with an attached trailer hitch. Turn off Park Assist when towing a trailer.
To turn the RPA symbols, guidance lines, or Rear Cross Traffic Alert on or off, see "Rear Camera" and "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152. On
Driving and Operating 245
some models, select the guidance lines button on the infotainment display to turn them on or off.
Assistance Systems for Driving
If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert (LCA), and/or Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly beeps or pulses the driver seat. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely.
246 Driving and Operating
FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph). If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), it can detect vehicles to distances of approximately 110 m (360 ft) and operates at all speeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 232.
FCA can be disabled with either the FCA steering wheel control or, if equipped, through vehicle personalization. See "Collision/ Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
{ Warning
FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane.
{ Warning
FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair.
Collision Alert
With Head-Up Display
Without Head-Up Display
When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Collision Alert occurs.
Tailgating Alert
The vehicle-ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely.
Selecting the Alert Timing The Collision Alert control is on the
steering wheel. Press [ / 3 to
set the FCA timing to Far, Medium, Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting
Driving and Operating 247
the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timing may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), changing the FCA timing setting automatically changes the ACC following gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).
Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, this may correct the issue:
. Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror.
. Clean the entire front of the vehicle.
248 Driving and Operating
. Clean the headlamps.
For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 367.
System operation may also be limited under snow, heavy rain, or road spray conditions.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
If the vehicle has Forward Collision Alert (FCA), it also has AEB, which includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. This automatic emergency braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA
vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 245.
The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197 ft).
{ Warning
AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on AEB to brake the vehicle. AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles.
AEB may not:
. Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.
. Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.
. Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. The vehicle will only hold at a stop briefly. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will also release AEB.
{ Warning
AEB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released.
{ Warning
IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed.
AEB and IBA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See "Collision/Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152.
{ Warning
Using AEB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert, or if the vehicle has ACC to Off, when towing a trailer.
A system unavailable message may display if: . The front of the vehicle or
windshield is not clean.
Driving and Operating 249
. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with object detection.
. There is a problem with the StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
The AEB system does not need service.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
If equipped, the SBZA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. Since this system is part of the Lane Change Alert (LCA) system, read the entire LCA section before using this feature.
250 Driving and Operating
Lane Change Alert (LCA)
If equipped, the LCA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The LCA warning display will light up in the corresponding outside mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on.
{ Warning
LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.
LCA Detection Zones
1. SBZA Detection Zone 2. LCA Detection Zone The LCA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m (11 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 70 m (230 ft) behind the vehicle.
How the System Works The LCA symbol lights up in the outside mirrors when the system detects a moving vehicle in the next lane over that is in the side blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol indicates it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the LCA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.
Left Outside Right Outside Mirror Display Mirror Display
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror LCA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right outside mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in the next lane over in that
blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone. If the turn signal is activated in the same direction as a detected vehicle, this display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes.
LCA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. When you disable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert is also disabled. See "Collision/ Detection Systems" under Vehicle Personalization 0 152. If LCA is disabled by the driver, the LCA mirror displays will not light up.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The LCA system requires some driving for the system to calibrate to maximum performance. This calibration may occur more quickly if the vehicle is driving on a straight highway road with traffic and roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).
LCA displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly, for a stopped vehicle, or when towing a trailer. The LCA detection zones
that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer. LCA may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle, or object extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of vehicles. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet conditions or when driving on sharp curves. The system does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not operate when the LCA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 367.
Driving and Operating 251
If the DIC still displays the system unavailable message after cleaning both sides of the vehicle toward the rear corners of the vehicle, see your dealer.
If the LCA displays do not light up when moving vehicles are in the side blind zone or are rapidly approaching this zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.
Radio Frequency Information
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. This system uses a camera to detect lane markings between 60 km/h (37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph). It may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert if the vehicle crosses a
252 Driving and Operating
detected lane marking. LKA can be overridden by turning the steering wheel. This system is not intended to keep the vehicle centered in the lane. LKA will not assist and alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if it detects that you are accelerating, braking or actively steering.
{ Warning
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected.
The LKA and LDW systems may not:
. Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash.
. Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera.
. Detect road edges.
. Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads.
If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle. Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
bad weather conditions or on roads with unclear lane markings, such as construction zones.
{ Warning
Using LKA while towing a trailer or on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off.
How the System Works LKA uses a camera sensor installed on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror to detect lane markings. It may provide brief steering assist if it detects an unintended lane departure. It may further provide an audible alert or driver seat may pulse indicating that a lane marking has been crossed.
To turn LKA on and off, press A
to the left of the steering wheel. If equipped, the indicator light on the button comes on when LKA is on and turns off when LKA is disabled.
When on, A is white, if equipped,
indicating that the system is not
ready to assist. A is green if LKA
is ready to assist and alert if the vehicle crosses detected markings on one or both sides of the lane. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane
marking. A is amber when
assisting. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
alert by flashing A amber if the
vehicle crosses a detected lane marking. Additionally, there may be three beeps, or the driver seat may pulse three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction.
Take Steering
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert, chime, or DIC message may be provided. Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA may become temporarily unavailable after repeated take steering alerts.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The system performance may be affected by:
. Close vehicles ahead.
. Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.
. Banked roads.
. Roads with poor lane markings, such as two-lane roads or in construction zones.
If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help.
Driving and Operating 253
A camera blocked message may display if the camera is blocked. Some driver assistance systems may have reduced performance or not work at all. Cleaning the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror may correct the issue. The LKA system does not need service.
LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue.
254 Driving and Operating
Fuel
Top Tier Fuel
GM recommends the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline to keep the engine clean, reduce engine deposits, and maintain optimal vehicle performance. Look for the TOP TIER Logo or see www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline marketers and applicable countries.
Recommended Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine)
If the vehicle has a yellow sticker on the fuel door, E85 or FlexFuel can be used. If the vehicle does not have a yellow sticker, do not use gasoline with ethanol levels greater than 15% by volume. See E85 or FlexFuel 0 255. Use regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating of 87 -- (R+M)/2 -- or higher. Do not use gasoline with a posted octane rating of less than 87, as this may cause engine knock and will lower fuel economy.
Recommended Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine)
Premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM specification D4814 with a posted octane rating of 93 -- (R+M)/2 -- is highly recommended for best performance and fuel economy. Unleaded gasoline with an octane rated as low as 87 can be used. Using unleaded gasoline rated below 93 octane, however, will lead to reduced acceleration and fuel economy. If knocking occurs, use a gasoline rated at 93 octane as soon as possible, otherwise, the engine could be damaged. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline with a 93 octane rating, the engine needs service.
Do not use any fuel labeled E85 or FlexFuel. Do not use gasoline with ethanol levels greater than 15% by volume.
Prohibited Fuels
Caution
Do not use fuels with any of the following conditions; doing so may damage the vehicle and void its warranty:
. For vehicles that are not FlexFuel, fuel labeled greater than 15% ethanol by volume, such as mid-level ethanol blends (1650% ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.
. Fuel with any amount of methanol, methylal, ferrocene, and aniline. These fuels can corrode metal fuel system parts or damage plastic and rubber parts.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
. Fuel containing metals such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT), which can damage the emissions control system and spark plugs.
. Fuel with a posted octane rating of less than the recommended fuel. Using this fuel will lower fuel economy and performance, and may decrease the life of the emissions catalyst.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
The U.S., Canada, and Mexico post fuel octane ratings in anti-knock index (AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreign country, see Prohibited Fuels 0 255.
Driving and Operating 255
Fuel Additives
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highly recommended for use with your vehicle. If your country does not have TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, add ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus-Gasoline to the vehicle's gasoline fuel tank at every oil change or 15 000 km (9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus-Gasoline will help keep your vehicle's engine fuel deposit free and performing optimally.
E85 or FlexFuel
Vehicles with a yellow fuel sticker on the fuel door can use either unleaded gasoline or fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). All other vehicles should use only the unleaded gasoline as described in Recommended Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine) 0 254 or Recommended Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine) 0 254.
256 Driving and Operating
The use of E85 or FlexFuel is encouraged when the vehicle is designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel is made from renewable sources.
To help locate fuel stations that carry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuel website. See www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/ stations.
E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 or CAN/ CGSB3.512 in Canada. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. Fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM or CGSB specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
The starting characteristics of E85 or FlexFuel make it unsuitable for use when temperatures fall below -18 °C (0 °F). Use gasoline or add gasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.
Because E85 or FlexFuel has less energy per liter (gallon) than gasoline, the vehicle will need to be refilled more often. See Filling the Tank 0 256.
The only GM approved aftermarket additive is ACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus-FlexFuel. Follow the instructions on the bottle for proper use. This product is available at your GM dealer.
Caution
Some additives are not compatible with E85 or FlexFuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Use only additives approved by GM for E85 or FlexFuel vehicles. Damage caused by unapproved additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.
To help keep the engine running efficiently, fill the tank with gasoline, up to E15, after filling the tank with E85 one or two times.
Filling the Tank
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge 0 130.
{ Warning
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Follow these guidelines to help avoid injuries to you and others:
. Read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island.
. Turn off the engine when refueling.
. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended.
. Avoid using electronic devices while refueling.
. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Before touching the fill nozzle, touch a metallic object to discharge static electricity from your body.
. Fuel can spray out if the fill nozzle is inserted too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Insert the fill nozzle slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop before beginning to flow fuel.
Driving and Operating 257
To open the fuel door, push and release the rearward center edge of the door. The capless refueling system does not have a fuel cap. Fully insert and latch the fill nozzle, then begin fueling.
{ Warning
Overfilling the fuel tank by more than three clicks of a standard fill nozzle may cause:
(Continued)
258 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
. Vehicle performance issues, including engine stalling and damage to the fuel system.
. Fuel spills. . Under certain conditions,
fuel fires.
Filling the Tank with a Portable Fuel Container
If the vehicle runs out of fuel and must be filled from a portable fuel container:
Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait five seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the fill nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care 0 367. Push the fuel door closed until it latches.
{ Warning
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the fill nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
1. Locate the capless funnel adapter.
2. Insert and latch the funnel into the capless fuel system.
{ Warning
Attempting to refuel from a portable fuel container without using the funnel adapter may cause fuel spillage and damage the capless fuel system. This could cause a fire. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged.
3. Remove and clean the funnel adapter and return it to the storage location.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ Warning
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. To help avoid injury to you and others:
. Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, in a pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Maintain contact until filling is complete.
. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
. Do not use electronic devices while pumping fuel.
Trailer Towing
General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle to tow a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer.
To tow a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle 0 363. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 364.
Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips
{ Warning
You can lose control when towing a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 259
Warning (Continued)
trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. You and others could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are
260 Driving and Operating
important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
When towing a trailer:
. Become familiar with and follow all state and local laws that apply to trailer towing. These requirements vary from state to state.
. State laws may require the use of extended side view mirrors. Even if not required, you should install extended side view mirrors if your visibility is limited or restricted while towing.
. Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 mi) of vehicle use to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts.
. It is recommended to perform the first oil change before heavy towing.
. During the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle.
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Tow/Haul Mode is recommended for heavier trailers. See Tow/ Haul Mode 0 218. If the transmission downshifts too often, a lower gear may be selected using Manual Mode. See Manual Mode 0 216.
If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned off when towing a trailer:
. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
. Super Cruise Control
. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
. Park Assist
. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)
. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
If equipped, the following driver assistance features should be turned to alert or off when towing a trailer:
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)
If equipped with Lane Change Alert (LCA), the LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer.
If equipped with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.
{ Warning
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
When towing a trailer:
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Also adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See "Climate Control Systems" in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust 0 212.
Towing a trailer requires experience. The combination of the vehicle and trailer is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get used to the handling and braking of the combination by driving on a level road surface before driving on public roads.
The trailer structure, the tires, and the brakes must be all be rated to carry the intended cargo. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner. Before driving, inspect all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. See Towing Equipment 0 270. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then manually apply the trailer brake controller to check the trailer brakes work. During the trip, occasionally check that the cargo and trailer are secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are working.
Towing with a Stability Control System
When towing, the stability control system might be heard. The system reacts to vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers.
Driving and Operating 261
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination of the vehicle and trailer will not accelerate as quickly and is much longer than the vehicle alone. It is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Pass on level roadways. Avoid passing on hills if possible.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
262 Driving and Operating
Making Turns
Caution
Turn more slowly and make wider arcs when towing a trailer to prevent damage to your vehicle. Making very sharp turns could cause the trailer to contact the vehicle.
Make wider turns than normal when towing, so trailer will not go over soft shoulders, over curbs, or strike road signs, trees, or other objects. Always signal turns well in advance. Do not steer or brake suddenly.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downhill grade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes may overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at higher altitudes, engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at lower altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle could show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run, preferably on level ground, with the transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating 0 300.
Parking on Hills
{ Warning
To prevent serious injury or death, always park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface when possible.
When parking your vehicle and your trailer on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
. Start the engine.
. Shift into a gear.
. Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Launching and Retrieving a Boat
Backing the Trailer into the Water
{ Warning
. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle before backing onto the sloped part of the ramp. Lower the driver and passenger side windows before backing onto the ramp. This will provide a means of escape in the unlikely event the vehicle slides into the water.
. If the boat launch surface is slippery, have the driver remain in the vehicle with the brake pedal applied while the boat is being launched. The boat launch
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
can be especially slippery at low tide when part of the ramp was previously submerged at high tide. Do not back onto the ramp to launch the boat if you are not sure the vehicle can maintain traction.
. Do not move the vehicle if someone is in the path of the trailer. Some parts of the trailer might be underwater and not visible to people who are assisting in launching the boat.
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water to prevent damage to the electrical circuits on the trailer. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. If the trailer has electric brakes that can function when the trailer is submerged, it might help to
Driving and Operating 263
leave the electrical trailer connector attached to maintain trailer brake functionality while on the boat ramp.
To back the trailer into the water:
1. If equipped, place the vehicle in four-wheel-drive high.
2. Slowly back down the boat ramp until the boat is floating, but no further than necessary.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet.
4. Have someone place chocks under the front wheels of the vehicle.
5. Gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
6. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
7. Release the brake pedal.
Pulling the Trailer from the Water
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
264 Driving and Operating
2. Start the engine and shift into a gear.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Let up on the brake pedal.
5. Drive slowly until the tires are clear of the chocks.
6. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
7. Slowly pull the trailer from the water.
8. Once the vehicle and trailer have been driven from the sloped part of the boat ramp, the vehicle can be shifted from four-wheel-drive high. Shift into the drive mode that is appropriate for the road conditions.
Caution
If the vehicle tires begin to spin and the vehicle begins to slide toward the water, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
and apply the brake pedal. Seek help to have the vehicle towed up the ramp.
Maintenance when Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when used to tow trailers. See Maintenance Schedule 0 379. It is especially important to check the automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system before and during each trip.
Check periodically that all nuts and bolts on the trailer hitch are tight.
Engine Cooling when Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating 0 300.
Trailer Towing
Caution
Towing a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To tow a trailer correctly, follow the directions in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Trailer Weight
{ Warning
Never exceed the towing capacity for your vehicle.
Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, dimensions of the front of the trailer, and how frequently the vehicle is used to tow a trailer.
Trailering Weight Ratings
When towing a trailer, the combined weight of the vehicle, vehicle contents, trailer, and trailer contents must be below all of the maximum weight ratings for the vehicle, including:
. GCWR: Gross Combined Weight Rating
. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
. Maximum Trailer Weight Rating
. GAWR-RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating-Rear
. Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating
See "Weight-Distributing Hitch Adjustment" under Towing Equipment 0 270 to determine if equalizer bars are required to obtain the maximum trailer weight rating.
See "Trailer Brakes" under Towing Equipment 0 270 to determine if brakes are required based on your trailer's weight.
The only way to be sure the weight is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip, getting individual weights for each of these items.
{ Warning
You and others could be seriously injured or killed if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load. The vehicle may be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Only tow a trailer if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer.
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any fuel, passengers, cargo, equipment, and accessories. Do not exceed the
Driving and Operating 265
GCWR for your vehicle. The GCWR for the vehicle is on the Tow Rating Chart following.
To check that the weight of the vehicle and trailer are within the GCWR for the vehicle, follow these steps:
. Start with the "curb weight" from the trailering information label
. Add the weight of the trailer loaded with cargo and ready for the trip
. Add the weight of all passengers
. Add the weight of all cargo in the vehicle
. Add the weight of hitch hardware such as a draw bar, ball, load equalizer bars, or sway bars
. Add the weight of any accessories or aftermarket equipment added to the vehicle
The resulting weight cannot exceed the GCWR value shown on the Trailering Information Label.
266 Driving and Operating
The gross combined weight can also be confirmed by weighing the vehicle and trailer on a public scale. The vehicle and trailer should be loaded for the trip with passengers and cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
For information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 196. When calculating the GVWR with a trailer attached, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the weight the vehicle is carrying.
Maximum Trailer Weight
The maximum trailer weight rating is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers, and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the tow rating chart to determine how much the trailer can weigh, based on the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Driving and Operating 267
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Yukon Denali 2WD
3.23
3 810 kg (8,400 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
Yukon Denali 4WD
3.23
3 674 kg (8,100 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
Yukon XL Denali 2WD
3.23
3 674 kg (8,100 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
Yukon XL Denali 4WD
3.23
3 583 kg (7,900 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Yukon 2WD
3.42
3 856 kg (8,500 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
Yukon AWD
3.42
3 719 kg (8,200 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
Yukon XL 2WD
3.42
3 765 kg (8,300 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
Yukon XL AWD
3.42
3 629 kg (8,000 lb)
6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.
268 Driving and Operating
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Yukon 2WD
3.08
2 948kg (6,500 lb)
5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
Yukon AWD
3.08
2 858 kg (6,300 lb)
5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
Yukon XL 2WD
3.08
2 858kg (6,300 lb)
5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
Yukon XL AWD
3.08
2 721 kg (6,000 lb)
5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.
Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating
The Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating is the allowable trailer tongue weight that the vehicle can support using a conventional trailer hitch. It may be necessary to reduce the overall trailer weight to stay within the maximum trailer tongue weight rating while still maintaining the correct trailer load balance.
Vehicle Series 1500 1500
Hitch Type Weight Carrying Weight Distributing
Maximum Tongue Weight
272 kg (600 lb)
453 kg (1,000 lb)
The trailer tongue weight contributes to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW includes the CURB WEIGHT of your vehicle, any passengers, cargo, equipment and the trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, passengers, cargo, and equipment reduce the maximum allowable tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which also reduces the maximum allowable trailer weight.
Trailer Load Balance
The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.
The trailer tongue weight (1) should be 1015% of the total loaded trailer weight (2). Some specific trailer types, such as boat trailers, fall outside of this range. Always refer to the trailer owner's manual for the recommended trailer tongue weight for each trailer. Never exceed the maximum loads for your vehicle, hitch and trailer.
Driving and Operating 269
The trailer load balance percentage is calculated as: weight (1) divided by weight (2) times 100.
After loading the trailer, separately weigh the trailer and then the trailer tongue and calculate the trailer load balance percentage to see if the weights and distribution are appropriate for your vehicle. If the trailer weight is too high, it may be possible to trasfer some of the cargo into your vehicle. If the trailer tongue weight is too high or too low, it may be possible to rearrange some of the cargo inside of the trailer.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. Use the shortest hitch extension available to position the hitch ball closer to your vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of the trailer tongue weight on the trailer hitch and the rear axle.
If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible. Make sure the total weight,
270 Driving and Operating
including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR-RR)
The GAWR-RR is the total weight that can be supported by the rear axle of the vehicle. Do not exceed the GAWR-RR for the vehicle, with the tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight-distributing hitch, do not exceed the GAWR-RR before applying the weight distribution spring bars.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or assistance.
Towing Equipment
Hitches
Always use the correct hitch equipment for your vehicle. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads can affect the trailer and the hitch.
Proper hitch equipment for your vehicle helps maintain control of the vehicle-trailer combination. Many trailers can be towed using a weight-carrying hitch which has a coupler latched to the hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle hook. Other trailers may require a weight-distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight between your vehicle and trailer axles. See "Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating" under Trailer Towing 0 264 for weight limits with various hitch types.
Never attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches. Only use frame-mounted hitches that do not attach to the bumper.
Hitch Cover
To remove hitch cover, if equipped: 1. Remove the two fasteners on the lower tabs (2). 2. Pull the lower edge of the cover to about a 45 degree angle. 3. Pull the cover upward to disengage the upper attachments (1).
To reinstall hitch cover:
1. Hold cover at a 45 degree angle to the vehicle and push the upper tabs into the slots in the bumper.
2. Push the bottom of the cover forward until the lower tabs line up with the lower slots.
3. Snap the hitch cover into place by pushing the upper corners forward (1).
4. Reinstall the two fasteners on the lower tabs (2).
Consider using mechanical sway controls with any trailer. Ask a trailering professional about sway controls or refer to the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Driving and Operating 271
Weight-Distributing Hitch Adjustment
A weight-distributing hitch may be useful with some trailers. Use the following guidelines to determine if a weight-distributing hitch should be used.
272 Driving and Operating
Vehicle Series 1500
Trailer Weight Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb)
Weight-Distributing Hitch Usage
Optional
1500
Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb)
Required
Hitch Distribution
Refer to trailer manufacturer's recommendation
50%
1. Front of Vehicle 2. Body to Ground Distance
When using a weight-distributing hitch, measure the front fender height above the front axle distance (2) before and after connecting trailer. Adjust the spring
bars until the front fender height distance (2) is approximately half way between the first and second measurements.
If equipped with Automatic Level Control 0 229, it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
Tires
. Do not tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire on the vehicle.
. Tires must be properly inflated to support loads while towing a trailer. See Tires 0 326 for instructions on proper tire inflation.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer, and attach the chains to the holes on the trailer hitch platform. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Loaded trailers over 900 kg (2,000 lb) must be equipped with brake systems and with brakes for each axle. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.
State or local regulations may require trailers to have their own braking system if the loaded weight of the trailer exceeds certain minimums that can vary from state to state. Read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly. Never attempt to tap into your vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both the vehicle anti-lock brakes and the trailer brakes may not function, which could result in a crash.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The seven-pin trailer connector is mounted in the bumper. This connector can be plugged into a
seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector available through your dealer.
Use only a round, seven-wire connector with flat blade terminals meeting SAE J2863 specifications for proper electrical connectivity.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits:
. Yellow/Grey: Left Stop/Turn Signal
. Green/Violet: Right Stop/Turn Signal
. Grey/Brown: Taillamps
. White: Ground
. White/Green: Back-up Lamps
. Red/Green: Battery Feed
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
To help charge a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the Tow/ Haul Mode button at the end of the shift lever. If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul Mode, turn on the headlamps to help charge the battery.
Driving and Operating 273
Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The harness should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center.
Refer to the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller owner's manual to determine wire color coding of the electric trailer brake controller. The wire colors on the brake controller may be different from the vehicle.
Trailer Lamps
Always check all trailer lamps are working at the beginning of each trip, and periodically on longer trips.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When properly connected, the trailer turn signals should will illuminate to indicate the vehicle is turning,
274 Driving and Operating
changing lanes, or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument cluster will illuminate even if the trailer is not properly connected or the bulbs are burned out.
Tow/Haul Mode
For instructions on how to enter Tow/Haul mode, see Tow/Haul Mode 0 218.
Tow/Haul assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Tow/Haul Mode is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See "Maximum Trailer Weight" under Trailer Towing 0 264.
Tow/Haul Mode is most useful when towing a heavy trailer or carrying a large or heavy load:
. through rolling terrain
. in stop-and-go traffic
. in busy parking lots
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Mode when lightly loaded or not towing will not cause damage; however, it is not recommended and may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system for use with electric trailer brakes or most electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems. These instructions apply to both types of electric trailer brakes.
This symbol is on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an ITBC system. The power output to the trailer brakes is proportional to the amount of vehicle braking. This
available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations.
The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle's brake, anti-lock brake, and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle's anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent to the trailer's brakes will be automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.
If the vehicle's brake, anti-lock brake, or StabiliTrak systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system may not function fully or at all. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to allow the ITBC system to function properly.
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle's electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional only when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
{ Warning
Connecting a trailer that has an air brake system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking, including increased stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in serious injury, death, or property damage. Only use the ITBC system with electric or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems.
Trailer Brake Control Panel
1. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
2. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The ITBC control panel is on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to as Trailer Gain, available to the trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer brakes. Use the ITBC control panel and the DIC trailer brake display page to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes.
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC display page indicates:
. Trailer Gain setting
. Output to the trailer brakes
. Trailer connection
. System operational status.
To display:
. Scroll through the DIC menu pages
. Press a Trailer Gain (+) or (-) button
Driving and Operating 275
. Activate the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
TRAILER GAIN:
Press a Trailer Gain button to recall the current Trailer Gain setting. Each press and release of the gain buttons will then change the Trailer Gain setting. Press the Trailer Gain (+) or (-) to adjust. Press and hold to continuously adjust the Trailer Gain. To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with a trailer connected or disconnected.
TRAILER OUTPUT: This displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is displayed from 0 to 100% for each gain setting.
The Trailer Output will indicate "- - - - -" on the Trailer Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:
. No trailer is connected.
276 Driving and Operating
. A trailer without electric brakes is connected, no DIC message will display
. A trailer with electric brakes has become disconnected, a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message displays on the DIC
. There is a fault present in the wiring to the trailer brakes, a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message displays on the DIC
. The ITBC system is not working due to a fault, a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in the DIC
Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
Slide this lever left to apply the trailer's electric brakes independent of the vehicle's brakes. Use this lever to adjust Trailer Gain to achieve the proper power output to the trailer brakes. The trailer's and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on when either vehicle brakes or manual trailer brakes are applied and properly connected.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and it must be readjusted anytime vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change.
{ Warning
Trailer brakes that are over-gained or under-gained may not stop the vehicle and the trailer as intended and can result in a crash. Always follow the instructions to set the Trailer Gain for the proper trailer stopping performance.
To adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition:
1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to 25 mph) and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake apply lever.
Note
Adjusting Trailer Gain at speeds lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to 25 mph) may result in an incorrect gain setting.
2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons, to just below the point of trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
Note
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition.
3. Readjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while towing.
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages
TRAILER CONNECTED: This message will briefly display when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically turn off in about 10 seconds. This message can be acknowledged before it automatically turns off.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This message will display if:
. The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected the vehicle.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary, this message will automatically turn off in about 30 seconds. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message will continue until the ignition is turned off. This
message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected.
. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the trailer brakes. This message will continue as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer wiring. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged.
To determine whether the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition off.
3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message reappears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only reappears when connecting the
Driving and Operating 277
trailer wiring harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM: This message will display when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message continues over multiple ignition cycles, there is a problem with the ITBC system. Have the vehicle serviced.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message displays while driving, the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all. When traffic conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs service.
A GM dealer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer. However, any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty.
278 Driving and Operating
Contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature. Trailer sway is unintended side-to-side motion of a trailer while towing. If the vehicle is towing a trailer and the TSC detects that sway is increasing, the vehicle brakes are selectively applied at each wheel, to help reduce excessive trailer sway. If equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, and the trailer has an electric brake system, StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer brakes.
If TSC is enabled, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light will flash on the instrument cluster. Reduce vehicle speed by gradually removing your foot from the accelerator. If trailer sway continues, StabiliTrak can reduce engine torque to help slow the vehicle. TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 226.
{ Warning
Trailer sway can result in a crash and in serious injury or death, even if the vehicle is equipped with TSC.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
If the trailer begins to sway, reduce vehicle speed by gradually removing your foot from the accelerator. Then pull over to check the trailer and vehicle to help correct possible causes, including an improperly or overloaded trailer, unrestrained cargo, improper trailer hitch configuration, or improperly inflated or incorrect vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing Equipment 0 270 for trailer ratings and hitch setup recommendations.
Aftermarket Electronic Trailer Sway Control Devices
Some trailers may come equipped with an electronic device designed to reduce or control trailer sway. Aftermarket equipment manufacturers also offer similar devices that connect to the wiring between the trailer and the vehicle. These devices may interfere with
the vehicle's trailer brake systems or other systems, including integrated anti-sway systems, if equipped. Messages related to trailer connections or trailer brakes could appear on the DIC. The effects of these aftermarket devices on vehicle handling or trailer brake performance is not known.
{ Warning
Use of aftermarket electronic trailer sway control devices could result in reduced trailer brake performance, loss of trailer brakes, or other malfunctions, and result in a crash. You or others could be seriously injured or killed. Before using one of these devices:
. Ask the device or trailer manufacturer if the device has been thoroughly tested for compatibility with the make, model, and year of
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
your vehicle and any optional equipment installed on your vehicle.
. Before driving, check the trailer brakes are working properly, if equipped. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface that is free of traffic at about 32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and fully apply the manual trailer brake apply lever. Also, check the trailer brake lamps and other lamps are functioning correctly.
. If the trailer brakes are not operating properly at any time, or if a DIC message indicates problems with the trailer connections or trailer brakes, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road when traffic conditions allow.
Driving and Operating 279
Trailer Tires
Special Trailer (ST) tires differ from vehicle tires. Trailer tires are designed with stiff sidewalls to help prevent sway and to support heavy loads. These features can make it difficult to determine if the trailer tire pressures are low only based on a visual inspection.
Always check all trailer tire pressures before each trip when the tires are cool. Low trailer tire pressure is a leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs.
Trailer tires deteriorate over time. The trailer tire sidewall will show the week and year the tire was manufactured. Many trailer tire manufacturers recommend replacing tires more than six years old.
Overloading is another leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs. Never load your trailer with more weight than the tires are designed to support. The load rating is located on the trailer tire sidewall.
280 Driving and Operating
Always know the maximum speed rating for the trailer tires before driving. This may be significantly lower than the vehicle tire speed rating. The speed rating may be on the trailer tire sidewall. If the speed rating is not shown, the default trailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h (65 mph).
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical Equipment
{ Warning
The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/Maintenance testing. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Check Engine Light) 0 136 . A device connected to the DLC -- such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device -- may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicle's systems.
Caution
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84.
Vehicle Care
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . 282 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . 283 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 291 Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 292 Automatic Transmission Fluid (10-Speed Transmission) . . . 295 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 296 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 300 Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Battery - North America . . . . . . 305 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 306 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 308 Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 309 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 309 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 310 Windshield Replacement . . . . . 310 Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Headlamp Aiming Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 314
Vehicle Care 281
Electrical System Electrical System Overload . . . 314 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 315 Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Wheels and Tires Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 329 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
282 Vehicle Care
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 346 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 359
Jump Starting Jump Starting - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Towing the Vehicle Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Appearance Care Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
{ Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, as well as many of its service parts and fluids, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle.
See Battery - North America 0 305 and Jump Starting - North America 0 360 and the back cover.
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in electronic keys, may contain perchlorate materials. Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Accessories and Modifications
Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84.
Vehicle Care 283
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owner's manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 405.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 84.
284 Vehicle Care
If equipped with remote vehicle start, open the hood before performing any service work to prevent remote starting the vehicle accidentally. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 23.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records 0 391.
Caution
Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
Hood
{ Warning
Turn the vehicle off before opening the hood. If the engine is running with the hood open, you or others could be injured.
{ Warning
Components under the hood can get hot from running the engine. To help avoid the risk of burning unprotected skin, never touch these components until they have cooled, and always use a glove or towel to avoid direct skin contact.
Clear any snow from the hood before opening.
To open the hood: 1. Pull the hood release lever with
the i symbol. It is on the
lower left side of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary release lever under the front center of the hood. Push the secondary hood release lever to the right to release.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, the spring system will automatically lift the hood and hold it in the fully open position.
To close the hood:
1. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly, and all tools are removed.
2. Pull the hood down until the spring system is no longer holding up the hood.
3. Allow the hood to fall. Check to make sure the hood is latched completely. Repeat this process with additional force if necessary.
{ Warning
Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before driving.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message if the hood is not fully closed, and the vehicle is moving. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
Vehicle Care 285
286 Vehicle Care Engine Compartment Overview
5.3L V8 Engine
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 360.
2. Battery - North America 0 305.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 297.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.
5. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid" under Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) 0 292 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (10-Speed Transmission) 0 295.
6. Remote Negative () Location (Out of View). See Jump Starting - North America 0 360.
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 297.
8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 289.
9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 289.
10. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Washer Fluid 0 302.
11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 304.
12. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 315.
Vehicle Care 287
288 Vehicle Care
6.2L V8 Engine
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting - North America 0 360.
2. Battery - North America 0 305.
3. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System 0 297.
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.
5. Remote Negative () Location (Out of View). See Jump Starting - North America 0 360.
6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System 0 297.
7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 289.
8. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under Engine Oil 0 289.
9. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Washer Fluid 0 302.
10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brake Fluid 0 304.
11. Engine Compartment Fuse Block 0 315.
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:
. Use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" in this section.
. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See "Checking Engine Oil" and "When to Add Engine Oil" in this section.
. Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System 0 291.
. Always dispose of engine oil properly. See "What to Do with Used Oil" in this section.
Vehicle Care 289
Checking Engine Oil
If equipped, the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL message displays when the engine oil level may be too low. Check the oil level before filling to the recommended level. If the oil is not low and this message remains on, see your dealer.
Check the engine oil level regularly, every 650 km (400 mi), especially prior to a long trip. The engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286 for the location.
{ Warning
The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle.
Follow these guidelines:
. To get an accurate reading, park the vehicle on level ground. Check the engine oil level after the engine has been off for at least two hours. Checking the
290 Vehicle Care
engine oil level on steep grades or too soon after engine shutoff can result in incorrect readings. Accuracy improves when checking a cold engine prior to starting. Remove the dipstick and check the level.
. If unable to wait two hours, the engine must be off for at least 15 minutes if the engine is warm, or at least 30 minutes if the engine is not warm. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it with a clean paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick and the engine has been off for at least 15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" later in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications 0 393.
Caution
Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If the oil level is above the operating range (i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range), the engine could be damaged. Drain the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle, and seek a service professional to remove the excess oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286 for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
Specification
Use full synthetic engine oils that meet the dexos1 specification.
Engine oils that have been approved by GM as meeting the dexos1 specification are marked with the dexos1 approved logo. See www.gmdexos.com.
Caution
Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Viscosity Grade
Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade engine oil.
When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, it is recommended to select an oil of the correct specification. See "Specification" earlier in this section.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils meeting the dexos1 specification are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never
Vehicle Care 291
dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on to indicate that an oil change is necessary. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the
292 Vehicle Care
best conditions, the oil life system may indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the engine oil life system:
1. Display the REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
2. Press and hold V. The oil life
will change to 100%.
The oil life system can also be reset as follows:
1. Display the REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Display the REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started and/or the REMAINING OIL LIFE is near 0%, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheated transmission. If a small leak is suspected, then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Caution
Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the correct
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
automatic transmission fluid. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
Change the fluid and filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule 0 379. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid
Caution
Too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle:
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift lever back to P (Park).
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 800 rpm) for at least one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and check the transmission fluid temperature on the Driver
Vehicle Care 293
Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
6. Using the transmission fluid temperature reading, determine and perform the appropriate check procedure. If the transmission fluid temperature reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 27 °C and 32 °C (80 °F and 90 °F).
294 Vehicle Care
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way; wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 71 °C to 93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °F and 200 °F). The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way; wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is between 71 °C and 93 °C (160 °F and 200 °F), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band. If the fluid level is low,
add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact the dealer.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (10-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
Vehicle Care 295
transmission leak or overheated transmission. This vehicle is not equipped with a transmission fluid level dipstick. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid in these vehicles. Because this procedure is difficult, this should be done at the dealer. Contact the dealer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual. See Publication Ordering Information 0 405.
Caution
Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damage may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the correct automatic transmission fluid. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
Change the fluid and filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule 0 379. Be sure to use the
296 Vehicle Care
transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
For intervals on changing and inspecting the engine air cleaner/ filter, see Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Do not start the engine or have the engine running with the engine air cleaner/filter housing open. Before removing the engine air cleaner/ filter, make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby components are free of dirt and debris. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shake the engine air cleaner/filter (away from the vehicle), to release loose
dust and dirt. Inspect the engine air cleaner/filter for damage, and replace if damaged. Do not clean the engine air cleaner/filter or components with water or compressed air. To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:
1. Screws (4) 2. Electrical Connector 3. Air Duct Clamp 1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286.
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by loosening the air duct clamp (3).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) and the connector harness from the cover.
4. Remove the four screws (1) on top of the cover of the housing and lift up the cover.
5. Remove the engine air cleaner/ filter from the housing. Take care to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
6. Clean the engine air cleaner/ filter sealing surfaces and the housing.
7. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstall the filter cover housing.
{ Warning
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. Use caution when working on the engine. Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle with the air cleaner/filter off, as flames may be present if the engine backfires.
Caution
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when driving.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.
1. Coolant Surge Tank 2. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap 3. Engine Electric
Cooling Fan(s)
{ Warning
An underhood electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 297
{ Warning
Do not touch heater or radiator hoses, or other engine parts. They can be very hot and can burn you. Do not run the engine if there is a leak; all coolant could leak out. That could cause an engine fire and can burn you. Fix any leak before driving the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating 0 300.
298 Vehicle Care
What to Use
{ Warning
Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. This mixture:
. Gives freezing protection down to -37 °C (-34 °F), outside temperature
. Gives boiling protection up to 129 °C (265 °F), engine temperature
. Protects against rust and corrosion
. Will not damage aluminum parts
. Helps keep the proper engine temperature
Caution
Do not use anything other than a mix of DEX-COOL coolant that meets GM Standard GMW3420 and clean, drinkable water. Anything else can cause damage to the engine cooling system and the vehicle, which would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, or by pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding
used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health. Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286. The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, wait until it cools down. The coolant level should be at or above the full cold mark. If it is not, there may be a leak in the cooling system.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the full cold mark, see "How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank," following.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank
{ Warning
Spilling coolant on hot engine parts can burn you. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
{ Warning
Plain water, or other liquids such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. With
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but there would not be an overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.
{ Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.
Vehicle Care 299
Caution Failure to follow the specific coolant fill procedure could cause the engine to overheat and could cause system damage. If coolant is not visible in the surge tank, contact your dealer.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
300 Vehicle Care
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the full cold mark.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates approximately 90 °C (195 °F).
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the full cold mark.
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
6. Verify coolant level after the engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 16.
Caution
If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
Caution
Do not run the engine if there is a leak in the engine cooling system. This can cause a loss of all coolant and can damage the system and vehicle. Have any leaks fixed right away.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gauge in the vehicle's instrument cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 0 131.
In addition, there are ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED messages in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 400.
If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Check to see if the engine cooling fan(s) are running. If the engine is overheating, the fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine. Have the vehicle serviced.
If Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment
{ Warning
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system are under pressure. Turning the pressure cap, even a little, can cause them to come out at high speed and you could be burned. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and pressure cap to cool.
If No Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem.
If there is an engine overheat warning, but no steam is seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing 0 264.
If the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message appears with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary.
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral), and let the engine idle.
Vehicle Care 301
If the engine coolant temperature gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally and have the cooling system checked for proper fill and function.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam and the vehicle is equipped with an engine driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least five minutes while the vehicle is parked. If the warning is still there, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
302 Vehicle Care
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for five minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
Engine Fan
If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, the fans may be heard spinning at low speed during most everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, high outside temperatures, or operation of the air conditioning system, the fans may change to high speed and an increase in fan noise may be heard. This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required.
The electric engine cooling fans may run after the engine has been turned. off. This is normal and no service is required.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message on the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays, washer fluid will need to be added to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286 for reservoir location.
Caution
. Do not use washer fluid that contains any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip.
. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.
. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
Brakes
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or can be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ Warning
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Caution
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
Vehicle Care 303
proper sequence to torque specifications. See Capacities and Specifications 0 393.
Brake pads should be replaced as complete sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed or if parts are improperly installed.
304 Vehicle Care Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286 for the location of the reservoir. Checking Brake Fluid With the vehicle in P (Park) on a level surface, the brake fluid level should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake fluid reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down: . Normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.
. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed. With a leak, the brakes will not work well.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ Warning
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 138.
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
What to Add
Use only GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
{ Warning
The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid.
Caution
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.
Battery - North America
The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid.
Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See Engine Compartment Overview 0 286 for battery location.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 282 and the back cover.
Vehicle Storage
{ Warning
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting North America 0 360 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Vehicle Care 305
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to Maintenance Schedule 0 379 to determine when to check the lubricant.
306 Vehicle Care
How to Check Lubricant
Automatic Transfer Case 1. Fill Plug 2. Drain Plug To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole, located on the transfer case, some lubricant will need to be added. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to Maintenance Schedule 0 379 to determine how often to change the lubricant.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. This service can be complex. See your dealer.
Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check the rear axle fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. This service can be complex. See your dealer.
Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or drive axles and should be replaced.
Noise Control System
Noise Emission Warranty
General Motors warrants to the first person who purchases this vehicle for purposes other than resale and to each subsequent purchaser that this vehicle as manufactured by General Motors was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time
it left General Motors control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations. This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and equipped by General Motors and is not limited to any particular part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by General Motors. Defects in design, assembly or any part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by General Motors, which at the time it left General Motors control caused noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by the warranty for the life of the vehicle.
The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs). The Maintenance Schedule provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of the vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in the vehicle warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
Removal of the noise shields or any underhood insulation.
Vehicle Care 307
Engine:
Removal or rendering engine speed governor, if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Fan and Drive:
. Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or rendering clutch inoperative.
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
. Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
. Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
. Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.
308 Vehicle Care
Starter Switch Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.
2. Apply both the parking brake and the regular brake.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Apply the parking brake. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
If equipped with a Key Access ignition, while parked and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition off in each shift lever position.
. The ignition should turn off only when the shift lever is in P (Park).
. The key should come out only when the ignition is off.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check
{ Warning
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
. To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
. To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 390.
Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield.
Vehicle Care 309 Front Wiper Blade Replacement
To replace the wiper blade assembly: 1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the windshield.
2. Lift up on the latch in the middle of the wiper blade where the wiper arm attaches.
3. With the latch open, pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield far enough to release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.
310 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the wiper blade. 5. Reverse Steps 13 for wiper
blade replacement. Rear Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the rear wiper blade: 1. With the rear wiper in the off
position, open the liftglass to access the rear wiper arm/ blade. The rear wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so use care when pulling it away from the vehicle.
2. Push the release lever (2) to disengage the hook and push the wiper arm (1) out of the blade assembly (3).
3. Push the new blade assembly securely in the wiper arm hook until the release lever clicks into place.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to the rest position on the glass.
Glass Replacement
If the windshield or front side glass must be replaced, see your dealer to determine the correct replacement glass.
Windshield Replacement
HUD System
The windshield is part of the HUD system. If the windshield must be replaced, get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image may look out of focus.
Driver Assistance Systems
If the windshield needs to be replaced and the vehicle is equipped with a front camera sensor for the Driver Assistance Systems, a GM replacement windshield is
recommended. The replacement windshield must be installed according to GM specifications for proper alignment. If it is not, these systems may not work properly, they may display messages, or they may not work at all. See your dealer for proper windshield replacement.
Gas Strut(s)
This vehicle is equipped with gas strut(s) to provide assistance in lifting and holding open the hood/ trunk/liftgate system in full open position.
{ Warning
If the gas struts that hold open the hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, you or others could be seriously injured. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service immediately. Visually inspect the gas struts for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage periodically. Check to make sure the hood/trunk/liftgate
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
is held open with enough force. If struts are failing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have the vehicle serviced.
Caution
Do not apply tape or hang any objects from gas struts. Also do not push down or pull on gas struts. This may cause damage to the vehicle.
See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
Hood Trunk
Vehicle Care 311
Liftgate
312 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, or any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Caution
Do not replace incandescent bulbs with aftermarket LED replacement bulbs. This can cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting
{ Warning
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them.
After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, the beam might be a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal.
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.
Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lamp bulb: 1. Locate the fog lamp under the
front bumper.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb assembly by pressing the connector release.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it from the housing.
Back-Up Lamps
To replace a back-up bulb:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate 0 27.
2. Remove the taillamp closeout cover from the lamp assembly by pulling rearward from the top and bottom at the same time to unfasten the snap tabs.
3. Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly.
4. Pull the taillamp assembly straight back to remove.
Vehicle Care 313
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly.
6. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
7. Put a new bulb into the socket, insert it into the taillamp assembly, and turn the bulb socket clockwise until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the screws.
9. Reinstall the taillamp cover by snapping it into place.
314 Vehicle Care License Plate Lamp
Passenger Side Shown, Driver Side Similar
1. Bulb Socket 2. Bulb 3. Lamp Assembly
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Push the lamp assembly (3) toward the center of the vehicle.
2. Pull the lamp assembly down to remove.
3. Turn the bulb socket (1) counterclockwise to remove it from the lamp assembly (3).
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of the bulb socket (1).
5. Push the replacement bulb straight into the bulb socket and turn the bulb socket clockwise to install it into the lamp assembly.
6. Push the lamp assembly back into position until the release tab locks into place.
Electrical System
Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses to protect against an electrical system overload. Fuses also protect power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, there are some spare fuses and a fuse puller in the left instrument panel fuse block. The same amperage fuse can also be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
{ Danger
Fuses and circuit breakers are marked with their ampere rating. Do not exceed the specified amperage rating when replacing fuses and circuit breakers. Use of an oversized fuse or circuit breaker can result in a vehicle fire. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.
To check a fuse, look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. Replace the fuse as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 315 Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover to access the fuse block.
316 Vehicle Care
Caution
Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.
A fuse puller is available in the left instrument panel fuse block.
Vehicle Care 317
318 Vehicle Care
Fuses 1 2
3 4
5
6
7 8 10
11 12 13 14 15 16
Usage
Power assist steps
Antilock brake system pump
Interior BEC LT1
Passenger motorized seat belt
Suspension leveling compressor
4WD transfer case electronic control
Electric parking brake/
Interior BEC LT2
Rear BEC 1
Fuses 17 18 19 20 21
22 23
24 25
26
27 28 30
Usage
Driver motorized seat belt
Automatic headlamp leveling/ Exhaust solenoid
Fuel pump
Integrated chassis control module
Real time dampening
Fuel pump power module
Active Hydraulic Assist/ Battery regulated voltage control
Upfitter 2
Wiper
Fuses 31
32 33 34 35
36 38 39
40
41
42
43 44
Usage
Trailer interface module
Reverse lamps
Antilock brake system valve
Trailer brakes
Right trailer stoplamp/Turn signal lamp
Left trailer stoplamp/turn signal lamp
Trailer parking lamps
Right parking lamps
Left parking lamps
Upfitter 3
Fuses 45
46 47 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
61 62 63 64
Usage Automatic level control/Run/Crank Upfitter 4 Reverse lamps Euro trailer Air conditioning control Upfitter 1
Fuses 65 66 67 68
69 70
71 73 74
75
76
77 78
79 80 81
Usage
Trailer battery
Secondary fuel pump
RC upfitter 3 and 4
VBAT upfitter 3 and 4
Engine control module/Ignition
Miscellaneous/ Ignition/
Transmission/ Ignition
RC upfitter 1 and 2
VBAT upfitter 1 and 2
Vehicle Care 319
Fuses 82 83 85 86 87
88 89 90 91 93 94 95
96 97 98 99 100 101
Usage Euro trailer/RC MAF/IAT/Humidity/ TIAP sensor Injector A odd Injector B even O2 sensor B Throttle control Horn Fog lamps High-beam headlamps O2 sensor A Engine control module
320 Vehicle Care
Fuses 102
103
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 113 114
115
116 117 118
Usage
Engine control module/ Transmission control module
Auxiliary interior heater
Starter
Aeroshutter
Police upfitter
Front windshield washer
Rear window washer
Left cooling fan
Fuel pump prime
Fuses 119 120 121
122 123
Relays 9 29 37 48 51 64
72 84 92
112 120
Usage Right HID headlamp Left HID headlamp Right cooling fan
Usage Fuel pump Upfitter 2 Upfitter 3 Upfitter 4 Parking lamp Secondary fuel pump Upfitter 1 Run/Crank Engine control module Starter Fuel pump prime
Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right)
The right instrument panel fuse block access door is on the passenger side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
There are relays on the back of the fuse block. To access, press the tabs and remove the fuse block.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Vehicle Care 321
Fuses 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
Usage Accessory power outlet 4 Glove box Steering wheel controls Body control module 8
322 Vehicle Care
Fuses 19 20
21
22 23 24 25 26 27
28
29
Usage
Body control module 4
Rear seat entertainment
Sunroof/beacon upffiter
Infotainment/Airbag
/RF window switch/ Rain sensor
Obstacle detection/USB
Radio
Fuses 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37
38 39 40 41 42 43
Usage Special equipment option B2 Special equipment option Body control module 2 DC to AC inverter
Fuses 44
45 46 47 48 49 50
56
Usage Right door window motor Front blower Body control module 6 Body control module 7 Amplifier Right front seat Accessory power outlet 3
Relays 51 52
53 54 55
Usage Retained accessory power
Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left)
The left instrument panel fuse block access door is on the driver side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
Vehicle Care 323
324 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
Accessory power
outlet 1
5
Accessory power
outlet from retained
accessory power
6
Accessory power
outlet from battery
power
7
Universal garage door
opener/SEO Roof
beacon switch
8
SEO/Retained
accessory power
9
10
Body control module 3
11
Body control module 5
Fuses 12
13 14 15 16
17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
Usage
Steering wheel control backlighting
Discrete logic ignition sensor
Video processing module/Virtual key module
Mirror window module
Body control module 1
Front bolster
HVAC ignition/AUX HVAC ignition
Instrument cluster/ Ignition sensing diagnostic module ignition
Fuses 26 27
28
29 30 31 32 33
34
35 36 37 38
Usage
Tilt column/Tilt column lock 1/SEO 1/SEO 2
Data link connector/ Driver seat module
Passive entry, Passive start/HVAC battery/ CGM
Content theft deterrent
SEO Automatic level control/Left heated seat
Park enable/Electric adjustable pedal
Miscellaneous/Run crank
Heated steering wheel
Steering column lock 2
Fuses 39
40 41 42 43 44 45 46
47
48 49 50
56
Usage Instrument cluster battery Euro trailer Left doors Driver power seat Right heated, cooled, or ventilated seat Left heated, cooled, or ventilated seat Accessory power outlet 2
Relays 51 52
Usage
Retained accessory power
Relays 53 54 55
Usage Run crank
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Vehicle Care 325
The rear compartment fuse block is behind the access panel on the left side of the compartment.
Pull the panel out by grabbing the finger access slot at the rear edge.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
326 Vehicle Care
Fuses 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12 13 14
15
19
Usage
Right heated second row seat
Heated mirrors
Liftgate
Glass breakage
Liftglass
Liftgate module logic
Rear wiper
Rear heating, ventilation, and air conditioning blower
Second row seat folding
Liftgate module
Third row seat folding
Rear accessory power outlet
Rear window defogger
Rear fog lamp
Relays 1
16 17 18 20
Usage Rear window defogger Liftgate Liftglass Rear fog lamp Heated mirror
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ Warning
. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact -- such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.
. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.
. Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation 0 334 for inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed driving.
Vehicle Care 327
All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original equipment all-season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be "MS."
Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires 0 328.
328 Vehicle Care
Winter Tires
This vehicle was not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires 0 342.
With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
If using winter tires:
. Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.
. Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability.
Low-Profile Tires
If the vehicle has P275/55R20 or P285/45R22 size tires, they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use. The low-profile, wide tread design is not recommended for off-road driving. See Off-Road Driving 0 188, for additional information.
Caution
Low-profile tires are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding into a curb. The warranty does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible, avoid contact with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
All-Terrain Tires
This vehicle may have all-terrain tires. These tires provide good performance on most road surfaces, weather conditions, and for off-road driving. See Off-Road Driving 0 188.
The tread pattern on these tires may wear more unevenly than other tires. Consider rotating the tires more frequently than at 12 000 km (7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear is noted when the tires are inspected. See Tire Inspection 0 340.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The example shows a typical passenger vehicle tire sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire (1) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(3) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third
Vehicle Care 329
week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
(4) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 344.
330 Vehicle Care
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure 0 333 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
(8) Temporary Use Only : Only use a temporary spare tire until the road tire is repaired and replaced. This spare tire should not be driven on over 112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, with the proper inflation pressure. See Full-Size Spare Tire 0 359.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The example shows a typical passenger vehicle tire size.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(2) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the tire illustration, it
would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(4) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction.
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(6) Service Description : These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight : The combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width.
Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure 0 333.
Curb Weight : The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Vehicle Care 331
Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.
GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.
332 Vehicle Care
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight : The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight : The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure 0 333 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/ 16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 341.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards) : A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 344.
Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See "Tire and Loading Information Label" under Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.
Vehicle Care 333
{ Warning
Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:
. Tire overloading and overheating which could lead to a blowout.
. Premature or irregular wear.
. Poor handling.
. Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:
. Unusual wear.
. Poor handling.
. Rough ride.
. Needless damage from road hazards.
334 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 196. How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the pressure of the tires once a month or more.
Do not forget the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. See Full-Size Spare Tire 0 359 for additional information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the
inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture and prevent leaks. Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation
{ Warning
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, puts additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat buildup and can cause sudden tire failure.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
This could cause a crash, and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow the vehicle to be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high-speed operation, are in excellent condition, and are set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
When driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, set the cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi) above the recommended tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. Return the tires to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure when high-speed driving has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196 and Tire Pressure 0 333.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Vehicle Care 335
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then
336 Vehicle Care
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 336.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. If the vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays, see Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure 0 333.
The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection 0 340, Tire Rotation 0 340 and Tires 0 326.
Caution
Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:
. One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
Vehicle Care 337
. The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.
. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires 0 342.
338 Vehicle Care
. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, it cannot detect or signal a low tire pressure condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on.
Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)
This feature provides visual and audible alerts outside the vehicle to help when inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended cold tire pressure.
When the low tire pressure warning light comes on:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe, level place.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
4. Add air to the tire that is underinflated. The turn signal lamp will flash.
When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamp will stop flashing and briefly turn solid.
Repeat these steps for all underinflated tires that have illuminated the low tire pressure warning light.
{ Warning
Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Do not exceed the maximum pressure listed on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 329 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops. To release and correct the pressure, while the turn signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of
the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once.
If the turn signal lamp does not flash within 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, the tire fill alert has not been activated or is not working.
If the hazard warning flashers are on, the tire fill alert visual feedback will not work properly.
The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions:
. There is interference from an external device or transmitter.
. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
. There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
. There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps.
. The identification code of the TPMS sensor is not registered to the system.
. The battery of the TPMS sensor is low.
If the tire fill alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or forward and try again. If the tire fill alert feature is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the vehicle's tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. Also, the TPMS sensor matching process should be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off at the next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS relearn tool can also be purchased. See Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Activation Tool at www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or call 1-800-GM TOOLS (1-800-468-6657).
There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted.
The TPMS sensor matching process is:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition on without starting the vehicle or place the vehicle in Service Mode. See Ignition Positions (Keyless Access) 0 202 or Ignition Positions (Key Access) 0 204.
3. Make sure the Tire Pressure info page option is turned on. The info pages on the DIC can
Vehicle Care 339
be turned on and off through the Settings menu. See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144.
4. Use the DIC controls on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll to the Tire Pressure screen under the DIC info page.
5. Press and hold V in the center
of the DIC controls.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
6. Start with the driver side front tire.
7. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.
340 Vehicle Care
8. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7.
9. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7.
10. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off.
11. Turn the vehicle off.
12. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
. The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.
. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.
Tires are rotated to achieve a uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 341 and Wheel Replacement 0 346.
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure 0 333 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 336.
Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications 0 393, and "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" under Tire Changing 0 349.
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
Vehicle Care 341
buildup. Do not get grease on the wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.
Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust
Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining. Some
342 Vehicle Care
commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. See Tire Inspection 0 340 and Tire Rotation 0 340 for additional information.
The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. To identify the age of a tire, use the tire manufacture date which is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) which is molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of 0310.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.
Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 329 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling
performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. See Tire Rotation 0 340 for information on proper tire rotation. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle.
{ Warning
Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.
{ Warning
Mixing tires of different sizes, tread patterns, or types on the same axle may cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the same size, load range, and type of tires as the original tires.
This vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle. When new, the vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as the road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive on it. The spare tire was developed for use on this vehicle and will not affect vehicle handling.
Vehicle Care 343
{ Warning
Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires' maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating.
If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.
344 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 335.
The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196 for the label location and more information about the Tire and Loading Information label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic stability control,
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected.
{ Warning
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires 0 342 and Accessories and Modifications 0 283.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Vehicle Care 345
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
346 Vehicle Care
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.
{ Warning
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Caution
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ Warning
Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{ Warning
If the vehicle has 265/65R18, P265/65R18, P275/55R20, or P285/45R22 size tires, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle's tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it is contacting the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install them on the rear tires.
Caution
If the vehicle has P255/70R17 or P265/70R17 size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 347
Caution (Continued)
when necessary. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the rear tires only. Do not use chains on the front tires. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there ever is a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
348 Vehicle Care
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
{ Warning
Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.
{ Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 0 168.
{ Warning
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. For vehicles with four-wheel drive with an N (Neutral) transfer case position, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in N (Neutral).
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.
6. Place wheel blocks, if equipped, on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of the wheel blocks (1), if equipped.
1. Wheel Block (If Equipped) 2. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire.
Tire Changing
Before changing a flat tire, see "Hands-Free Operation" under Liftgate 0 27.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment needed to change a flat tire is stored in the rear of the vehicle, on the driver side, behind a door in the trim panel.
Vehicle Care 349
1. Jack Knob 2. Wing Nut Retaining the
Wheel Blocks 3. Wing Nut Retaining the
Tool Bag
350 Vehicle Care
4. Turn the jack knob (1) counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket.
5. Turn the wing nut retaining the wheel blocks (2) counterclockwise to remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer.
Use the following tools:
To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics and instructions:
1. Pull to open the trim panel door.
The third row driver side seat may need to be folded to access the trim panel door.
2. Lift the acoustic pad to access the jack and tools.
3. Turn the wing nut retaining the tool bag (3) counterclockwise to remove it.
Pull the tool bag toward the front of the vehicle and lift the rear portion of the bag upward to remove it.
1. Jack 2. Wheel Blocks 3. Jack Handle 4. Jack Handle Extensions 5. Wheel Wrench
1. Hoist Assembly 2. Hoist Shaft 3. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole 4. Jack Handle Extensions 5. Wheel Wrench 6. Spare Tire Lock 7. Hoist End of Extension Tool 8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole 9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down) 10. Tire/Wheel Retainer 11. Hoist Cable
1. Open the hoist shaft access door (3) on the bumper to access the spare tire lock (6).
If equipped with a hitch cover, turn the hitch cover retainers counterclockwise and pull the cover downward to remove it before removing the hoist shaft access door.
2. To remove the spare tire lock (6), insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (4) and wheel wrench (5), as shown.
Vehicle Care 351
4. Insert the open end of the extension (7) through the hole in the rear bumper (8) (hoist shaft access hole).
Be sure the hoist end of the extension (7) connects to the hoist shaft. The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
6. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
352 Vehicle Care
7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer.
Tilt the retainer and pull it and the cable and spring through the center of the wheel.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 347 for more information.
2. If the vehicle has a center cap that covers the wheel fasteners, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out.
If the wheel has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be retained in the hub cap after it is removed from the wheel.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
{ Warning
To avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, disable the power assist steps before using a jack or placing an object under the vehicle. See Power Assist Steps 0 32.
Vehicle Care 353
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
4. Position the jack under the vehicle, as shown.
Left Front Shown, Right Front
Similar
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle, use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
Rear Position
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle, use the jack handle (2) and both jack handle extensions (3). Attach the wheel wrench (4) to the jack handle extensions (3). Attach the jack handle (2) to the jack (1). Use the jacking pad (5) provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench (4) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough
354 Vehicle Care
off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
{ Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is lifted on a jack is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 6. Take off the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel.
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare tire.
{ Warning
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub.
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
{ Warning
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 355
Warning (Continued)
aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications 0 393 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Caution
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications 0 393 for the wheel nut torque specification.
When reinstalling the regular wheel and tire, also reinstall either the center cap or the bolt-on hub cap, depending on which one the vehicle has.
356 Vehicle Care
. For center caps, line up the tab on the center cap with the slot in the wheel. The cap only goes in one way. Place the cap on the wheel and press until it snaps into place.
. For bolt-on hub caps, line up the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and tighten clockwise by hand to get them started. Then tighten with the wheel wrench until snug.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{ Warning
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
{ Warning
Failure to follow these tire storage instructions carefully could result in personal injury or property damage if the hoist cable fails or if the tire comes loose. Make sure the tire is stored securely before driving.
Caution
Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as possible.
Caution
The tire hoist can be damaged if there is no tension on the cable when using it. To have the necessary tension, the spare or road tire and wheel assembly must be installed on the tire hoist to use it.
{ Warning
An improperly stored spare tire could come loose and cause a crash. To avoid personal injury or property damage, always store the spare tire when the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics and instructions:
1. Hoist Assembly 2. Hoist Shaft 3. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole 4. Jack Handle Extensions 5. Wheel Wrench 6. Spare Tire Lock 7. Hoist End of Extension Tool 8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole 9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down) 10. Tire/Wheel Retainer 11. Hoist Cable
1. Put the tire (9) on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the tire/wheel retainer from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down through the center wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.
Vehicle Care 357
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (4) and wheel wrench (5).
Caution
Use of an air wrench or other power tools with the hoist mechanism is not recommended and could damage the system. Use only the tools supplied with the hoist mechanism.
358 Vehicle Care
4. Insert the open end of the extension (7) through the hole in the rear bumper (8) (hoist shaft access hole).
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. The cable cannot be overtightened.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Repeat this tightness check procedure when checking the spare tire pressure according to the scheduled maintenance information or any time the spare tire is handled due to service of other components.
Correctly Stored
Incorrectly Stored
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.
If equipped, reinstall the hitch cover and turn the retainers clockwise.
To store the tools:
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with the wing nut.
3. Position the jack and wheel blocks in the driver side trim panel over the wheelhouse.
4. Turn the jack knob clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket to fasten the tool bag on the stud and turn the wing nut clockwise to secure.
6. Close the trim panel door.
Full-Size Spare Tire
If this vehicle came with a full-size spare tire, it was fully inflated when new, however, it can lose air over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. See Tire Pressure 0 333 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 196. For instructions on how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, see Tire Changing 0 349.
If equipped with a temporary use full-size spare tire, it is indicated on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 329. This spare tire should not be driven on over 112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at the proper inflation pressure. Repair and replace the road tire as soon as it is convenient, and stow the spare tire for future use.
Caution
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, do not drive in four-wheel drive until the flat tire is repaired and/or replaced. The vehicle could be damaged and the repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when a different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 359
This spare tire was developed for use on this vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, drive only in two-wheel drive.
After installing the spare tire on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and check that the spare tire is correctly inflated.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced and installed back onto the vehicle as soon as possible so the spare tire will be available in case it is needed again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together. If the vehicle has a spare tire that does not match the original road tires and wheels in size and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
360 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting
Jump Starting - North America
For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery - North America 0 305.
If the vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
HANDLING. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ passenger-vehicle.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 282 and the back cover.
{ Warning
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
. They contain acid that can burn you.
. They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
. They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
Caution
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Caution
If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause an
unwanted ground connection. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake. For vehicles with four-wheel-drive with a N (Neutral) transfer case position, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not N (Neutral).
Caution
If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting.
3. Turn the ignition off on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on that vehicle.
The positive (+) terminal is under a red plastic cover at the positive battery post. To uncover the positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover.
Vehicle Care 361
For more information on the location of the remote positive (+) and remote negative (-) terminals, see Engine Compartment Overview 0 286.
{ Warning
An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
{ Warning
Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
(Continued)
362 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
{ Warning
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable to the metal bracket that is bolted to the
engine and supports the resonator, on the vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Caution
If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables.
After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes.
Vehicle Care 363
Towing the Vehicle
Caution
Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle may cause damage. The damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not lash or hook to suspension components. Use the proper straps around the tires to secure the vehicle. Do not drag a locked wheel/tire. Use tire skates or dollies under any locked wheel/ tire while loading the vehicle. Do not use a sling type lift to tow the vehicle. This could damage the vehicle.
Caution
If the vehicle cannot be shifted into Neutral (N), do not use the tow eye to tow the vehicle. Vehicle damage may occur.
364 Vehicle Care
GM recommends a flatbed tow truck to transport a disabled vehicle. Use ramps to help reduce approach angles, if necessary. A towed vehicle should have its drive wheels off the ground. Contact Roadside Assistance or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. Front Attachment Points
The vehicle is equipped with specific attachment points to be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed car carrier from a flat road
surface. Do not use these attachment points to pull the vehicle from snow, mud or sand.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle, such as a motor home. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels on a dolly.
Follow the tow vehicle manufacturer's instructions. See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing:
. Before towing the vehicle, become familiar with the local laws that apply to recreational vehicle towing. These laws may vary by region.
. What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.
. What is the distance that will be traveled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
. Is the proper towing equipment going to be used? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
. Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.
Caution
Use of a shield mounted in front of the vehicle grille could restrict airflow and cause damage to the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If using a shield, only use one that attaches to the towing vehicle.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Caution
If the two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Vehicle Care 365
Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drive vehicles with a two speed transfer case that have a N (Neutral) and a 4
n setting.
{ Warning
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). You or others could be injured. Set the parking brake before shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral).
To dinghy tow:
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle, facing forward and on a level surface.
2. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle.
3. Apply the parking brake and start the engine.
366 Vehicle Care
4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See "Shifting into N (Neutral)" under Four-Wheel Drive 0 219. Check that the vehicle is in N (Neutral) by starting the engine and shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) and then to D (Drive). There should be no movement of the vehicle while shifting.
5. Shift the transmission into D (Drive). Turn the engine off.
Caution
Failure to disconnect the negative battery cable or to have it contact the terminals can cause damage to the vehicle.
6. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and secure the nut and bolt. Cover the negative battery post with a non-conductive material to prevent any contact with the negative battery terminal.
7. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
Caution
If the steering column is locked, vehicle damage may occur.
8. Move the steering wheel to make sure the steering column is unlocked.
9. With a foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake.
10. Keep the ignition key in the towed vehicle in ACC/ ACCESSORY to prevent the steering column from locking. If equipped with Keyless Access, keep the RKE transmitter outside of the vehicle, and manually lock the doors. Access the vehicle as if it has a dead RKE transmitter battery, by using the key in the door lock.
Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle
Before disconnecting the towed vehicle:
1. Park on a level surface.
2. Set the parking brake, then shift the transmission to P (Park).
3. Connect the battery.
4. Apply the brake pedal.
5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. Shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral)
to 2 m. See "Shifting out of
N (Neutral)" under Four-Wheel Drive 0 219. See your dealer if the transfer case cannot be shifted out of N (Neutral).
6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 m
by starting the engine and shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) and then to D (Drive). There should be movement of the vehicle while shifting.
7. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn off the ignition.
8. Disconnect the vehicle from the tow vehicle.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Reset any lost presets.
The outside temperature display will default to 0 °C (32 ° F) but will reset with normal usage.
Dolly Towing
Caution
Do not tow this vehicle with two wheels on the ground, or vehicle damage could occur. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Dolly towing this vehicle is not allowed with either the front or the rear tires on the ground for two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive, regardless of transfer case.
Vehicle Care 367
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.
Caution
Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
(Continued)
368 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued)
your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Caution
Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Caution
Do not power wash any component under the hood that
has this e symbol.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
If using an automatic car wash, follow the car wash instructions. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be off. Remove any accessories that may be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to
have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur.
Caution
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.
To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings
Caution
Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:
. Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution.
. Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome or stainless steel. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.
. Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer's instructions.
. Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish.
Vehicle Care 369
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and Stripes
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals, and stripes. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" previously in this section.
Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them when dry.
Do not use any of the following on lamp covers:
. Abrasive or caustic agents.
. Washer fluids and other cleaning agents in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer.
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners.
. Ice scrapers or other hard items.
370 Vehicle Care
. Aftermarket appearance caps or covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated.
Caution
Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only.
Air Intakes Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.
Weatherstrips
Apply weatherstrip lubricant on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at least once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces
can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.
Caution
Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/ or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.
Wheels and Wheel Trim
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
Caution
Chrome wheels and chrome wheel trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium chloride or calcium chloride. These are used on roads for conditions such as dust and ice. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.
Caution
To avoid surface damage on wheels and wheel trim, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, or brushes. Use only GM approved cleaners. Do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash that uses silicon carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Brake System
Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts.
Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components
Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year.
Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks.
Vehicle Care 371
For 1500 Series vehicles, at least every other oil change lubricate the outer tie rod ends.
Control arm ball joints on 1500 Series vehicles are maintenance-free.
Caution
Lubrication of applicable steering/ suspension points should not be done unless the temperature is -12 °C (10 °F) or higher, or damage could result.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel fuel door hinge and power assist step hinges, unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
372 Vehicle Care
Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. If equipped with power assist steps, extend them and then use a high pressure wash to clean all joints and gaps.
Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. See "Finish Care" previously in this section.
Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Immediately remove any soils. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Using a mild soap solution, immediately remove hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.
Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage. Apply all cleaners directly to the cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls. Remove cleaners quickly.
Before using cleaners, read and follow all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows to get proper ventilation.
To prevent damage, do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques:
. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove soil from any interior surface.
. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.
. Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure.
. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. For liquid cleaners, use approximately 20 drops per 3.8 L (1 gal) of water. A concentrated soap solution will create streaks and attract dirt. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.
. Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.
Interior Glass
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water.
Caution
To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.
Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap.
Coated Moldings
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
. When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
Vehicle Care 373
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is being used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:
. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.
. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.
2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth
374 Vehicle Care
to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil in to the fabric.
4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water.
If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.
After cleaning, use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays
Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.
Caution
Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces
Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap solution.
Caution
Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim, and are not recommended.
Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.
Caution
Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Cargo Cover and Convenience Net
If equipped, wash with warm water and mild detergent. Do not use chlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water, and then dry completely.
Care of Seat Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Vehicle Care 375
Floor Mats
{ Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage:
. The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.
376 Vehicle Care
. Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor.
. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.
. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on top of another.
Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the driver side floor mat to unlock each retainer and remove.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snapping into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Service and Maintenance
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . 377
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 379
Special Application Services Special Application Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Additional Maintenance and Care
Additional Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Maintenance Records Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 391
Service and Maintenance 377
General Information
Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.
Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.
Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place
for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.
Caution
Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
Do not have chemical flushes that are not approved by GM performed on the vehicle. The use of flushes, solvents, cleaners, or lubricants that are not approved by GM could damage the vehicle, requiring expensive repairs that are not covered by the vehicle warranty.
378 Service and Maintenance
The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions.
Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services Normal are for vehicles that:
. Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 196.
. Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel (L83 5.3L V8 Engine) 0 254 or Recommended Fuel (L86 6.2L V8 Engine) 0 254.
Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal chart.
The Additional Required Services Severe are for vehicles that are:
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather.
. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.
. Frequently towing a trailer.
. Used for high speed or competitive driving.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe chart.
{ Warning
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work 0 283.
Maintenance Schedule
Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Stop
. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil 0 289.
Once a Month
. Check the tire inflation pressures, including the spare. See Tire Pressure 0 333.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Tire Inspection 0 340.
. Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 0 302.
Engine Oil Change
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate the need for vehicle service for up to a year. The engine oil and
Service and Maintenance 379
filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the last service. Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System 0 291.
Extended Idle Use
When the vehicle is used in a way that requires extended idle time, one hour of use shall be deemed the same as 53 km (33 mi). See Driver Information Center (DIC) 0 144 for hourmeter.
Air Conditioning Desiccant (Replace Every Seven Years)
The air conditioning system requires maintenance every seven years. This service requires replacement of the desiccant to help the longevity and efficient operation of the air conditioning system. This service can be complex. See your dealer.
Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 12 000 km/ 7,500 mi
Rotate the tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and perform the following services. See Tire Rotation 0 340.
. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. See Engine Oil 0 289 and Engine Oil Life System 0 291.
. Check engine coolant level. See Cooling System 0 297.
. Check windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 0 302.
. Check tire inflation pressures, including the spare. See Tire Pressure 0 333.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection 0 340.
. Visually check for fluid leaks.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.
380 Service and Maintenance
. Inspect brake system. See
.
Exterior Care 0 367.
. Visually inspect steering,
suspension, and chassis
.
components for damage,
including cracks or tears in the
.
rubber boots, loose or missing
parts, or signs of wear at least
once a year. See Exterior Care 0 367. Lubricate the suspension .
and steering components at
least every other oil change (if
.
equipped with grease fittings).
. Inspect power steering for
.
proper attachment, connections,
binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
.
. Visually inspect halfshafts and
drive shafts for excessive wear,
lubricant leaks, and/or damage
including: tube dents or cracks,
constant velocity joint or universal joint looseness,
.
cracked or missing boots, loose
or missing boot clamps, center
bearing excessive looseness,
.
loose or missing fasteners, and
axle seal leaks.
Check restraint system components. See Safety System Check 0 71.
Visually inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Visually inspect exhaust system and nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts.
Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care 0 367.
Check starter switch. See Starter Switch Check 0 308.
Check ignition transmission lock. See Ignition Transmission Lock Check 0 308.
Check parking brake and automatic transmission park mechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check 0 309.
Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed.
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. If the hold open is low, service the gas strut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 310.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal, if equipped. See Sunroof 0 44.
. Verify spare tire key lock operation and lubricate as needed. See Tire Changing 0 349.
. Visually inspect the spare tire to ensure that it is tightly stowed under the vehicle. Push, pull, and try to turn the tire. If the spare tire moves, tighten as necessary. See Tire Changing 0 349.
Service and Maintenance 381
12 000 km/7,500 mi 24 000 km/15,000 mi 36 000 km/22,500 mi 48 000 km/30,000 mi 60 000 km/37,500 mi 72 000 km/45,000 mi 84 000 km/52,500 mi 96 000 km/60,000 mi 108 000 km/67,500 mi 120 000 km/75,000 mi 132 000 km/82,500 mi 144 000 km/90,000 mi 156 000 km/97,500 mi 168 000 km/105,000 mi 180 000 km/112,500 mi 192 000 km/120,000 mi 204 000 km/127,500 mi 216 000 km/135,000 mi 228 000 km/142,500 mi 240 000 km/150,000 mi
Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Inspect evaporative control system. (2)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6)
Replace brake fluid. (7)
Replace windshield wiper blades. (8)
Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. (9)
Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@ @ @
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
382 Service and Maintenance
Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal
(1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter.
(2) Visually check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever comes first. If driving in dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each oil change or more often as needed. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.
(4) Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
(5) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 297.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
(7) Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 304.
(8) Or every 12 months, whichever comes first. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 309.
(9) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 310.
(10) Replace air conditioning desiccant every seven years.
Service and Maintenance 383
12 000 km/7,500 mi 24 000 km/15,000 mi 36 000 km/22,500 mi 48 000 km/30,000 mi 60 000 km/37,500 mi 72 000 km/45,000 mi 84 000 km/52,500 mi 96 000 km/60,000 mi 108 000 km/67,500 mi 120 000 km/75,000 mi 132 000 km/82,500 mi 144 000 km/90,000 mi 156 000 km/97,500 mi 168 000 km/105,000 mi 180 000 km/112,500 mi 192 000 km/120,000 mi 204 000 km/127,500 mi 216 000 km/135,000 mi 228 000 km/142,500 mi 240 000 km/150,000 mi
Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1)
Inspect evaporative control system. (2)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4)
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5)
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6)
Replace brake fluid. (7)
Replace windshield wiper blades. (8)
Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. (9)
Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)
@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@ @ @
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
384 Service and Maintenance
Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe
(1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter.
(2) Visually check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper attachment, connection, routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever comes first. If driving in dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each oil change or more often as needed. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 296.
can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
(5) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 297.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
(7) Replace brake fluid every five years. See Brake Fluid 0 304.
(8) Or every 12 months, whichever comes first. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 309.
(9) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 310.
(10) Replace air conditioning desiccant every seven years.
(4) Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water
Special Application Services
. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every oil change.
. Have underbody flushing service performed. See "Underbody Maintenance" in Exterior Care 0 367.
Additional Maintenance and Care
Your vehicle is an important investment and caring for it properly may help to avoid future costly repairs. To maintain vehicle performance, additional maintenance services may be required.
It is recommended that your dealer perform these services -- their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best. Your dealer can also perform a thorough assessment with a multi-point inspection to recommend when your vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to explain the services and conditions to look for that may indicate services are required.
Battery
The 12-volt battery supplies power to start the engine and operate any additional electrical accessories.
Service and Maintenance 385
. To avoid break-down or failure to start the vehicle, maintain a battery with full cranking power.
. Trained dealer technicians have the diagnostic equipment to test the battery and ensure that the connections and cables are corrosion-free.
Belts
. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signs of cracking or splitting.
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the belts and recommend adjustment or replacement when necessary.
Brakes
Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucial to safe driving.
. Signs of brake wear may include chirping, grinding, or squealing noises, or difficulty stopping.
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the brakes and recommend quality parts engineered for the vehicle.
Fluids
Proper fluid levels and approved fluids protect the vehicle's systems and components. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388 for GM approved fluids.
. Engine oil and windshield washer fluid levels should be checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may come on to indicate that fluids may be low and need to be filled.
Hoses
Hoses transport fluids and should be regularly inspected to ensure that there are no cracks or leaks. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses and advise if replacement is needed.
386 Service and Maintenance
Lamps
Shocks and Struts
Properly working headlamps, taillamps, and brake lamps are important to see and be seen on the road.
. Signs that the headlamps need attention include dimming, failure to light, cracking, or damage. The brake lamps need to be checked periodically to ensure that they light when braking.
. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can check the lamps and note any concerns.
Shocks and struts help aid in control for a smoother ride.
. Signs of wear may include steering wheel vibration, bounce/ sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneven tire wear.
. As part of the multi-point inspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspect the shocks and struts for signs of leaking, blown seals, or damage, and can advise when service is needed.
Tires
Tires need to be properly inflated, rotated, and balanced. Maintaining the tires can save money and fuel, and can reduce the risk of tire failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be replaced include three or more visible treadwear indicators; cord or fabric showing through the
rubber; cracks or cuts in the tread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect and recommend the right tires. Your dealer can also provide tire/wheel balancing services to ensure smooth vehicle operation at all speeds. Your dealer sells and services name brand tires.
Vehicle Care
To help keep the vehicle looking like new, vehicle care products are available from your dealer. For information on how to clean and protect the vehicle's interior and exterior, see Interior Care 0 372 and Exterior Care 0 367.
Wheel Alignment
Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may need to be adjusted include pulling, improper vehicle handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Your dealer has the required equipment to ensure proper wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the best viewing, keep the windshield clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the windshield and recommend proper replacement if needed.
Service and Maintenance
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned and kept in good condition to provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking, skipping across the windshield, and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can check the wiper blades and replace them when needed.
387
388 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Automatic Transmission (Except DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Denali)
Automatic Transmission (Denali Only)
DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19352619, in Canada 19352620).
Chassis Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Cooling System 0 297.
Engine Oil
Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 289.
Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in Canada 89021678).
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (Two-Wheel Drive)
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, in Canada 19257122).
Hydraulic Brake System
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, in Canada 19353127).
Service and Maintenance 389
Usage Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,
Power Assist Steps, and Outer Liftgate Handle Pivot Points Rear Axle
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Windshield Washer
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, in Canada 19300458).
DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or equivalent.
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.
390 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
22845992
A3181C
Engine Oil Filter
12690385
PF63E
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
23281440
CF188
Spark Plugs
12622441
41114
Wiper Blades
Front Driver Side 55 cm (21.7 in)
84613732
--
Front Passenger Side 55 cm (21.7 in)
84613732
--
Rear 33 cm (13.0 in)
22956295
--
Service and Maintenance 391
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Date
Odometer Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
392 Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Service Parts Identification . . . 392
Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 395
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement
parts. See "Engine Specifications" under Capacities and Specifications 0 393 for the vehicle's engine code.
Service Parts Identification
There may be a large barcode on the certification label on the center pillar that you can scan for the following information:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
. Model designation
. Paint information
. Production options
If there is not a large barcode on this label, then you will find this same information on a label inside of the glove box.
Vehicle Data
Technical Data 393
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 388 for more information.
Application
Metric
Capacities English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System*
5.3L V8
16.8 L
17.8 qt
6.2L V8
16.8 L
17.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
5.3L V8
7.6 L
8.0 qt
6.2L V8
7.6 L
8.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Short Wheelbase
98.4 L
26.0 gal
Long Wheelbase
119.2 L
31.5 gal
Transfer Case Fluid
1.5 L
1.6 qt
394 Technical Data
Application
Metric
Capacities English
Wheel Nut Torque
190 Y
140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Spark Plug Gap
5.3L V8
C
0.951.10mm (0.037
0.043 in)
6.2L V8
J
0.951.10mm (0.037
0.043 in)
Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damage the spark plug.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines
Technical Data 395
396 Customer Information
Customer Information
Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 399 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 399 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 403 Publication Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 408 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 409
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by your dealership without further help, in the U.S., call 1-800-462-8782. In Canada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.
. Dealership name and location.
. Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE -- U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Customer Information 397
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 3033 Wilson Blvd. Suite 600 Arlington, VA 22201
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 http://www.bbb.org/council/ programs-services/ dispute-handling-and-resolution/ bbb-auto-line
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
STEP THREE -- Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One
398 Customer Information
and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail GMC, the letter should be addressed to:
United States and Puerto Rico
GMC Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33172 Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.gmc.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782) 1-888-889-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-888-881-3302
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Company Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.gmc.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Experience (U.S.) my.gmc.com
The GMC online owner experience allows access to videos, articles, and vehicle health specific to your GMC as well as your OnStar Account information all in one place.
Membership Benefits
E : Download owner's manuals
and view vehicle-specific how-to videos.
G : View maintenance schedules,
alerts, and Vehicle Diagnostic Information. Schedule service appointments.
I : View and print dealer-recorded
service records and self-recorded service records.
D : Select a dealer and view
locations, maps, phone numbers, and hours.
r : Track your vehicle's warranty
information.
J : View active recalls by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 392.
H : Compare and shop for GMC
and OnStar plans and Services. View GM Card and SiriusXM information (if equipped).
F : Chat live with online help
representatives.
See my.gmc.com to register your vehicle.
Customer Information 399 GMC Owner Centre (Canada) mygmccanada.ca
Visit the GMC Owner Centre at mygmccanada.ca (English) or my.gmccanada.ca (French) to access similar benefits to the U.S. site.
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program
This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement, up to certain limits, of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle. To learn about the GM Mobility program, see www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
400 Customer Information
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility program. See www.gm.ca or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call 1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready:
. Your name, home address, and home telephone number
. Telephone number of your location
. Location of the vehicle
. Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle
. Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
. Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided for the duration of the vehicle's powertrain warranty.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. General Motors North America and GMC reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.
General Motors North America and GMC reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
. Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.
. Emergency Tow from a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is not given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
. Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty event, incidental expenses may be reimbursed within the Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are reasonable and customary hotel, meals, rental car, or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 500 miles.
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance
. Impound towing caused by violation of any laws
. Legal fines
. Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices
Service is not provided if a vehicle is in an area that is not accessible to the service vehicle or is not a
regularly traveled or maintained public road, which includes ice and winter roads. Off-road use is not covered.
Services Specific to Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 150 km from where your trip was started to qualify. Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.
. Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside
Customer Information 401
Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
402 Customer Information
safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), extended powertrain, and/or hybrid-specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled "Limited Warranty and Owner Assistance Information" furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to do so, your dealer may offer the following transportation options:
Shuttle Service
This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If overnight warranty repairs are needed, and public transportation is used, the expense must be supported by original receipts and within the maximum amount allowed by GM. If U.S. customers arrange their own transportation, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
For an overnight warranty repair, the dealer may provide an available courtesy rental vehicle or provide for reimbursement of a rental vehicle. Reimbursement is limited and must be supported by original receipts as well as a signed and completed rental agreement and meet state/ provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Additional fees such as fuel, rental vehicle insurance, taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair are also your responsibility.
It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Contact your dealer for specific availability.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Customer Information 403
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/ corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.
404 Customer Information
Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs through the use of aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.
For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program 0 400.
Gather the following information:
. Driver name, address, and telephone number
. Driver license number
. Owner name, address, and telephone number
. Vehicle license plate number
. Vehicle make, model, and model year
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
. Insurance company and policy number
. General description of the damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See "Collision Parts" earlier in this section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? 0 78.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.
Publication Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engine, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical system, steering system, body, etc.
Customer Literature
Owner's manuals are written specifically for owners and are intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner's manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Customer literature publications available for purchase include owner's manuals, warranty manuals, infotainment manuals, and portfolios. Portfolios include an owner's manual, warranty manual, infotainment manual, if applicable, and zip lock bag or pouch.
Customer Information 405
Current and Past Models
Service manuals and customer literature are available for many current and past model year GM vehicles.
To order, call 1-800-551-4123 MondayFriday, 8:00 a.m.6:00 p.m. eastern time
For credit card orders only (VISA, MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
To order by mail, write to:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170
Make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with
406 Customer Information
Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED) Canada's RSP-100 / ICES-GEN.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Company. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510; go to:
www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)
www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)
or write to:
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Directorate Defect Investigations and Recalls Division 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.
In the U.S., call 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33172 Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Company Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0812 or 01-800-466-0801.
In other Central America and Caribbean Countries, call 52-722-236-0680.
Customer Information 407
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicle's performance and how it is driven or used. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle or to help GM improve safety or features. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
408 Customer Information
Cybersecurity
GM collects information about the use of your vehicle including operational and safety related information. We collect this information to provide, evaluate, improve, and troubleshoot our products and services and to develop new products and services. The protection of vehicle electronics systems and customer data from unauthorized outside electronic access or control is important to GM. GM maintains appropriate security standards, practices, guidelines and controls aimed at defending the vehicle and the vehicle service ecosystem against unauthorized electronic access, detecting possible malicious activity in related networks, and responding to suspected cybersecurity incidents in a timely, coordinated and effective manner. Security incidents could impact your safety or compromise your private data. To minimize security risks, please do not connect your vehicle electronic systems to unauthorized devices or connect
your vehicle to any unknown or untrusted networks (such as Bluetooth, WIFI or similar technology). In the event you suspect any security incident impacting your data or the safe operation of your vehicle, please stop operating your vehicle and contact your dealer.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/ or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar and has an active service plan, additional data may be collected and transmitted through the OnStar system. This includes information about the vehicle's operation; collisions involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features, including infotainment; and the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.
See OnStar Additional Information 0 412.
Customer Information 409
Infotainment System
Using the navigation system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. See the infotainment manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.
410 OnStar
OnStar
OnStar Overview OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
OnStar Services Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
OnStar Additional Information OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
OnStar Overview
= Voice Command Button Q Blue OnStar Button > Red Emergency Button
This vehicle may be equipped with a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to an OnStar Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connections, and Diagnostics Services. OnStar services may require a paid service plan and data plan. OnStar requires the vehicle battery and electrical system, cellular service, and GPS satellite signals to be available and operating. OnStar acts as a link to existing emergency service providers. OnStar may collect information about you and your vehicle, including location information. See OnStar User
Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms for more details including system limitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is:
. Solid Green: System is ready.
. Flashing Green: On a call.
. Red: Indicates a problem.
. Off: System is off. Press Q
twice to speak with an OnStar Advisor.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.
Functionality of the Voice Command button may vary by vehicle and region.
Press = to:
. Open the OnStar app on the infotainment display. See the infotainment manual for information on how to use the OnStar app.
Or
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice commands.
. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fi hotspot name or SSID and password, if equipped.
Press Q to connect to an
Advisor to:
. Verify account information or update contact information.
. Get driving directions.
. Receive a Diagnostic check of the vehicle's key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
. Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.
Press > to get a priority connection
to an OnStar Advisor available 24/ 7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
. Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.
. Get assistance in severe weather or other crisis situations and find evacuation routes.
OnStar 411
OnStar Services
Emergency
Emergency Services require an active safety and security plan. With Automatic Crash Response, built-in sensors can automatically alert a specially trained OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected in to the vehicle to help.
Press > for a priority connection to
an OnStar Advisor who can contact emergency service providers, direct them to your exact location, and relay important information.
With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially trained Advisors are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to provide a central point of contact, assistance, and information during a crisis.
With Roadside Assistance, Advisors can locate a nearby service provider to help with a flat tire, a battery jump, or an empty gas tank.
412 OnStar
Security
If equipped, OnStar provides these services:
. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance, OnStar Advisors can use GPS to pinpoint the vehicle and help authorities quickly recover it.
. With Remote Ignition Block, if equipped, OnStar can block the engine from being restarted.
. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown, if equipped, OnStar can work with law enforcement to gradually slow the vehicle down.
Theft Alarm Notification
If equipped, if the doors are locked and the vehicle alarm sounds, a notification by text, e-mail, or phone call will be sent. If the vehicle is stolen, an OnStar Advisor can work with authorities to recover the vehicle.
OnStar Additional Information
In-Vehicle Audio Messages
Audio messages may play important information at the following times:
. Prior to vehicle purchase. Press
Q to set up an account.
. After change in ownership and at 90 days.
Transferring Service
Press Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor can cancel or change account information.
Selling/Transferring the Vehicle
Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) immediately to terminate your OnStar or connected services if the vehicle is disposed of, sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.
Reactivation for Subsequent Owners
Press Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as possible. The Advisor will update vehicle records and explain OnStar or connected service options.
How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Services, and Roadside Assistance are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms:
. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
. Press Q to speak with an
Advisor.
OnStar or connected services cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. The wireless service provider must also have coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar or connected services. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar or connected services may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar or connected services may not work. Other problems beyond the control of OnStar -- such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage
to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming -- may prevent service.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 405.
Services for People with Disabilities
Advisors provide services to help with physical disabilities and medical conditions.
Press Q to help:
. Locate a gas station with an attendant to pump gas.
. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.
. Provide directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations.
TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. The available dealer-installed TTY system can provide in-vehicle
OnStar 413
access to all OnStar services, except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
If equipped, TTY mode can be turned on or off by touching Settings, then Apps, and then Phone. When TTY mode is on, phone calls can be made or received with OnStar using the infotainment display.
OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)
A PIN is needed to access some OnStar services. The PIN will need to be changed the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, contact an
OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
calling 1-888-4ONSTAR.
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the vehicle warranty.
414 OnStar
Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to respond in multiple languages.
Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
Advisors are available in English, Spanish, and French. Available languages may vary by country.
Potential Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for 10 days without an ignition cycle. If the vehicle has not been started for 10 days, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistance or a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
. Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels and underpasses; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still operate to
call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.
. In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.
A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception.
Unable to Connect to OnStar Message
If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message
may come on. Press Q to try the
call again or try again after driving a few miles into another cellular area.
Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 280. Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.
Vehicle Software Updates
OnStar or GM may remotely deliver software updates or changes to the vehicle without further notice or consent. These updates or changes may enhance or maintain safety,
security, or the operation of the vehicle or the vehicle systems. Software updates or changes may affect or erase data or settings that are stored in the vehicle, such as saved navigation destinations or pre-set radio stations. Neither OnStar nor GM is responsible for any affected or erased data or settings. These updates or changes may also collect personal information. Such collection is described in the OnStar privacy statement or separately disclosed at the time of installation. These updates or changes may also cause a system to automatically communicate with GM servers to collect information about vehicle system status, identify whether updates or changes are available, or deliver updates or changes. An active OnStar agreement constitutes consent to these software updates or changes and agreement that either OnStar or GM may remotely deliver them to the vehicle.
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com (U.S.), or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We recommend that you review it. If you have any questions, call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
or press Q to speak with an
Advisor. Users of wireless communications are cautioned that the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.
OnStar - Software Acknowledgements
Certain OnStar components include libcurl and unzip software and other third party software. Below are the notices and licenses associated with libcurl and unzip and for other third party software please see http:// opensource.lge.com/index
www.onstar.com/us/en/
OnStar 415
libcurl:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS," WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
416 OnStar
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
unzip:
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license. The definitive version of this document should be available at ftp:// ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ license.html indefinitely.
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set of individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich Wales, Mike White.
This software is provided "as is," without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled.
3. Altered versionsincluding, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports with new graphical interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versionsmust be plainly marked as such and must not
be misrepresented as being the original source. Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releasesincluding, but not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names "Info-ZIP" (or any variation thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), "Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names "Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip," "UnZipSFX," "WiZ," "Pocket UnZip," "Pocket Zip," and "MacZip" for its own source and binary releases.
OnStar 417
418 Connected Services
Connected Services
Connected Services Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Connected Services
Navigation
Navigation requires a specific OnStar or connected service plan.
Press Q to receive Turn-by-Turn
directions or have them sent to the vehicle's navigation screen, if equipped.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
1. Press Q to connect to an
Advisor.
2. Request directions to be downloaded to the vehicle.
3. Follow the voice-guided commands.
Using Voice Commands During a Planned Route
Functionality of the Voice Command button, if equipped, may vary by vehicle and region. For some
vehicles, press = to open the
OnStar app on the infotainment
display. For other vehicles press =
as follows.
Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Cancel route." System responds: "Do you want to cancel directions?"
3. Say "Yes." System responds: "OK, request completed, thank you, goodbye."
Route Preview
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Route preview." System responds with the next three maneuvers.
Repeat
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Repeat." System responds with the last direction given, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
Get My Destination
1. Press =. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Get my destination." System responds with the address and distance to the destination, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
Send Destination to Vehicle
Directions can be sent to the vehicle's navigation screen, if equipped.
Press Q, then ask the Advisor to
download directions to the vehicle's navigation system, if equipped. After the call ends, the navigation screen will provide prompts to begin driving directions. Routes that are sent to the navigation screen can only be canceled through the navigation system.
See www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Connections
The following services help with staying connected.
For coverage maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Ensuring Security
. Change the default passwords for the Wi-Fi hotspot and myGMC mobile application. Make these passwords different from each other and use a combination of letters, numbers, and symbols to increase the security.
. Change the default name of the SSID (Service Set Identifier). This is your network's name that is visible to other wireless devices. Choose a unique name and avoid family names or vehicle descriptions.
Connected Services 419
Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fi hotspot that provides access to the Internet and web content at 4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile devices can be connected. A data plan is required. Use the in-vehicle controls only when it is safe to do so.
1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspot
information, press = to open
the OnStar app on the infotainment display, then select Wi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings on the screen.
2. The Wi-Fi settings will display the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID), password, and on some vehicles, the connection type (no Internet connection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality (poor, good, excellent).
3. To change the SSID or
password, press Q or call
1-888-4ONSTAR to connect with an Advisor. On some
420 Connected Services
vehicles, the SSID and password can be changed in the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.
After initial set-up, your vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot will connect automatically to your mobile devices. Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fi on or off on your mobile device, using the myGMC mobile app, or by contacting an OnStar Advisor. On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also be managed from the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.
MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)
Download the myGMC mobile app to compatible Apple and Android smartphones. GMC users can access the following services from a smartphone:
. Remotely start/stop the vehicle, if factory-equipped.
. Lock/unlock doors, if equipped with automatic locks.
. Activate the horn and lamps.
. Check the vehicle's fuel level, oil life, or tire pressure, if factory-equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
. Send destinations to the vehicle.
. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S. market only).
. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitor data consumption, if equipped.
. Locate a dealer and schedule service.
. Request roadside assistance.
. Set a parking reminder with pin drop, take a photo, make a note, and set a timer.
. Connect with GMC on social media.
Features are subject to change. For myGMC mobile app information and compatibility, see my.gmc.com.
An active OnStar or connected service plan may be required. A compatible device, factory-installed remote start, and
power locks are required. Data rates apply. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations.
Remote Services
Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlock the doors or sound the horn and flash the lamps.
Marketplace
OnStar Advisors can provide offers from restaurants and retailers on your route, help locate hotels, or book a room. These services vary by market.
Diagnostics
By monitoring and reporting on the vehicle's key systems, OnStar Advanced Diagnostics, if equipped, provides a way to keep up on maintenance. Capabilities vary by model. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations. Features are subject to change. For updates on feature capabilities, see my.gmc.com. Message and data rates may apply.
Index
A Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . 211 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 232 Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 280 Additional Information
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 296 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179 Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Passenger Sensing System . . . .80 What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Index 421
Airbag System (cont'd) What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .75
Airbags Adding Equipment to the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Passenger Status Indicator . . . 135 Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Alarm Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Alert Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 249
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 224
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
422 Index
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Assistance Systems for Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 242
Automatic Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . 248 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 292, 295
Automatic Transmission Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Shift Lock Control Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B Battery
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Battery (cont'd) Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Battery - North America . . . .305, 360 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 309 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Brake
Pedal and Adjustable Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 138 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Automatic
Emergency (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 201 Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 314 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
C Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .282, 305, 360, Back Cover
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2 Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 110 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Charging Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 135 Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Check (cont'd) Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 308
Child Restraints Infants and Young Children . . . . . 88 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 105, 106 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 403 Compartments Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Connected Services Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Connections Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 419
Control Hill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Traction and Electronic Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Coolant
Engine Temperature Gauge . . 131 Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . 232 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Customer Information
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Index 423
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
D Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 403 Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3 Data Collection
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 409 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 408 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Diagnostics Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 420 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 395 Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 240 Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
424 Index
Driving Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 245 Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . 184 Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 193 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 195 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
E E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 315 Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 323
Electrical System (cont'd) Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Rear Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Emergency OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Check Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 286 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Coolant Temperature Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 130 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 212 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 408 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 164 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 166 Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
F Fan
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 168 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 FlexFuel
E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 111 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 295
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fluid (cont'd) Four-Wheel Drive Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .219, 305 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . 139 Frequency Statement
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Front Fog Lamp
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Front Seats
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . 54 Fuel
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Economy, Driving for Better . . . 184 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 142 Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . .211
Fuel (cont'd) Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 315 Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 323 Rear Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
G Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 130 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Transmission Temperature . . . . 132 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Index 425
Gauges (cont'd) Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Warning Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
General Information Service and Maintenance . . . . . 377 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
H Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 168 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 143 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 166
426 Index
Headlamps (cont'd) Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 143
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 334 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 193 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 228 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 225 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 How to Wear Seat Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 179
I Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . .202, 204 Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Indicator Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Information Publication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . 405
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . 5 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 41 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
J Jump Starting - North
America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
K Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . 13, 16 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 10
L Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 329 Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 167 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Lamps (cont'd) Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . 250 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 251 Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 139 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 LATCH System
Replacing Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Level Control
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Lighting (cont'd) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Lights Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 138 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . 141 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 142 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 166 Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 133 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Lights (cont'd) Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Lock Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 142 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
M Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . 229 Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Index 427
Maintenance and Care Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 379 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 136 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Messages
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Mirror Child-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Mirrors Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 41
428 Index
Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
N Navigation
Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . 418 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 306
O Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Oil Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 291 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 130 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 86 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 399 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Operation Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Outlets Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Overview
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
P Park
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 309 Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . .211 Parking or Backing Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 242 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 80 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . . 283
Personalization Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 209 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 70 Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 407 Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . 402 Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Proposition
65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 305, 360,
Back Cover Publication Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
R Radio Frequency Statement . . . . 405 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Rear Axle (cont'd) Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Rear Climate Control System . . . 179 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 242 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 118 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Recommended
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 364 Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 16 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Replacement
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 86 Replacing LATCH System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Replacing Seat Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 407 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Restraints Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Ride Control Systems Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Roads Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Roof Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 395 Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Index 429
S Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . 407 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 401 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 How to Wear Seat Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .72 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .70 Seats Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . . 54 Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .49 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .48 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .50
430 Index
Seats (cont'd) Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .103, 105, 106 Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 283 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 391 Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 401 Services Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Shift Lock Control Function Check, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Shifting (cont'd) Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 249 Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Special Application Services . . . . 384 Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 StabiliTrak
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Steps Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Storage Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Storage Areas Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Storage Areas (cont'd) Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 109 Struts
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 System
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 409 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Systems Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 399 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 36
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333, 334 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Pressure Monitor Operation . . 336 Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 335 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Terminology and Definitions . . 331 Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 346 When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tires (cont'd) Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 259 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 259 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 364 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 278 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . 141 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 278 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Transmission Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 292, 295 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 132
Index 431
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
U Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 344 Universal Remote System . . . . . . 160
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
V Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Identification Number (VIN) . . . 392 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 140
432 Index
Vehicle Care Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Vehicle Security Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . .35
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
W Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Warnings Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance . . 346 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 92 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 309 Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
84367243 B
Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode